JP6866942B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, Oite the gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, in case of per lottery results executed based on the starting winning are those favorable contact state is provided to the player. In some of these conventional gaming machines , for example, at least a part of the hits is provided with a time saving state in which a starting prize is likely to occur. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, for example, a game board is provided with a plurality of starting winning openings, and a game ball can easily win a prize in some of the starting winning openings due to a time saving state. It had attempted over the Xing taste of the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-230825

However, with such a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the player's interest in playing the game cannot be sufficiently improved .

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation, and a launching means capable of passing the gaming ball launched by the launching means. The first path, the second path different from the first path, and the position where the game ball passing through the first path can enter and the game ball passing through the second path is difficult to enter. The first ball-entry means provided and the position where the game ball passing through the second path can enter the ball and the game ball passing through the first path are provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball. 2 Variable to the ball-entry means, the first position where the game ball can enter the second ball-entry means, and the second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter into the second ball-entry means. A possible variable means, a discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and a first state in which the game ball can be entered. When a second state where a game ball than the first state becomes difficult ball entrance, in a variable, variable ball entrance means, predetermined based on the fact that to its variable ball entrance means a game ball to ball entrance Based on the privilege granting means for granting the privilege and the discrimination result of the discriminating means becoming a predetermined specific discriminating result, the variable ball-entry means changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable to and a game ball that is launched into the first path rather than the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition is used to determine the discriminating means. A plurality of game states including at least a first gaming state in which the determination means is more likely to be executed, and a second gaming state in which the determination of the discrimination means is more easily executed when the gaming ball is launched in the second path than in the first path. A common effect mode that does not depend on the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, based on the game state setting means capable of setting one of the game states and the execution of the variable game. It is an effect different from the first effect based on the fact that the first effect executing means for executing the first effect composed of the above and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied during the execution of the first effect. including at least a second effect consists in the specific effect possible embodiment suggests path corresponding to the playing state, which is set as a game state after execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means to the player The first condition is satisfied, which is at least different from that of the second effect executing means for executing the above and the determination result of the determination means in the second gaming state. A second game state setting means capable of setting the first game state without going through a variable game, and a player being told to launch a game ball into the first path when the first condition is satisfied. comprising a third demonstration execution means for executing a third effect consists at least comprise a suggested possible representation embodiment, the Te, game balls were fired into the first path during the previous SL first effect case also, with the specific conditions even when the game ball is fired a configuration can be established, when performing a game corresponding to the second game condition in the second game state to the second path The variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than when the game corresponding to the first game state is performed in the first game state, and the first game state is said to be the first. When a game corresponding to one game state is played, a game ball for a predetermined ball entry means that is at least different from the variable ball entry means, rather than playing a game corresponding to the second game state in the second game state. configuration der the ball entrance frequency of is likely to be higher Ru.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes display means capable of displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation, a first path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can pass, and a first path thereof. A second path different from the route and a first entry where the game ball passing through the first path can enter and the game ball passing through the second path is difficult to enter. A ball means, a second ball-entry means provided at a position where a game ball passing through the second path can enter, and a position where a game ball passing through the first path is difficult to enter, and a second ball-entry means thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and the above-mentioned a determining means for first ball entrance means or a game ball to the second ball entrance means executes the discrimination based on the fact that the ball entrance, a first state in which the game ball is possible ball entrance, from the first state a variable, variable ball entrance means also a second state in which the game ball is difficult ball entrance to, privilege granting means to its variable ball entrance means a game ball to impart specific privilege based upon the ball entrance A variable game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. First, it is easier to discriminate the discriminating means when the gaming ball is launched to the first path than to the second path based on the variable game executing means for executing the above and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. One of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination of the discriminating means is more likely to be executed when the gaming ball is launched on the second path than on the first path. A first effect composed of a game state setting means capable of setting a state and a common effect mode that does not depend on the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed based on the completion of the execution of the variable game. Based on the fact that the first effect executing means for executing the first effect and the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied during the execution of the first effect, the effect is different from that of the first effect and is described by the game state setting means. the second effect execution of the variable game execution executes at least comprising a second effect consists in the specific effect possible embodiment suggests path corresponding to the playing state, which is set as a game state after the completion of the player Based on the fact that the first condition, which is at least different from that of the means and the discriminating result of the discriminating means in the second gaming state, is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied without going through the variable game. At least a second game state setting means capable of setting one game state and an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player that a game ball is fired to the first path when the first condition is satisfied. includes and a third demonstration execution means for executing a third effect configured to, even if the game ball is fired into said first path during the previous SL first effect, the second path wherein even when the game ball is fired to a particular condition is a configuration that may be established, when the game corresponding to the second game condition was performed in the second game state, it said in the first gaming state The variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than the game corresponding to the first game state, and the game corresponding to the first game state in the first game state is When this is done, the frequency of ball entry of the game ball to a predetermined ball entry means that is at least different from the variable ball entry means is likely to be higher than that of playing a game corresponding to the second game state in the second game state. configuration der made Ru.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid and the operation of an opening / closing plate in 1 jackpot. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 in the first embodiment and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is the first embodiment in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and (c) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots. It is a schematic diagram which schematically shows the content of the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal), and (d) is the schematic diagram which shows the content of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the opening selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the avoidance period in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the launch direction notification effect in the second embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the launch direction notification effect in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the latent return effect in the second embodiment. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the first type selection table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the opening selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit random number table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving type selection table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initial ball entry process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the transition method of the game state in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and entry ports 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a normal entry opening. When 67 is passed, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are four types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit D". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game is based on the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The two types of "big hits A and B" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of "big hits C and D" are jackpot types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the ball is the second entrance 640. The lottery that is executed when the ball enters the ball is called the second special symbol lottery.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. To be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "big hit A" to "big hit D" are provided.

When "Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are reached, the number of rounds is 8 rounds in a special gaming state (8 rounds big hit). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit C" and "big hit D", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15 rounds big hit). Further, after each of the above jackpots is completed, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes the probability variation switch 65e3 described later), the game shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability variation of the special symbol) after the jackpot ends. When a high-probability state of a special symbol is given, the high-probability state of the special symbol and the state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased continue from the end of the big hit until the fluctuation of the special symbol ends 50 times. .. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the special symbol is not given (the ball did not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the jackpot game), the state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased is the change of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Continues until the end of 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (high probability state of the normal symbol) means a gaming state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is in a time-saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory being released by hitting the ordinary symbol once. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it is in the "high probability state of the special symbol" from the end of the jackpot until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed 50 times. The probability variation period of the special symbol is not limited to 50 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol". After that, it becomes a big hit, and when the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, it shifts from the "normal state of the normal symbol" to the "time saving state of the normal symbol". In this case, the set "time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued from the end of the jackpot until the variation display of the special symbol is completed 100 times. After becoming a big hit of a special symbol, if it does not become a big hit of a new special symbol by the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols, it returns to the "normal state of the normal symbol".

Then, if a new jackpot is reached while the "normal symbol time saving state" is being continued, the "normal symbol time saving state" will be further special for 50 or 100 times after the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the variable display of the symbol is completed.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of times is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to D). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entry. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice will be produced by appearing.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of ball entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display or fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are displayed. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. .. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st entrance 64 and the 2nd entrance 640, for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged on the lower right side of the front view with respect to the first ball entry port 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second entry slot 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is opened, a ball that flows down from the right direction is provided. It becomes possible to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640, it is basically necessary to let the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display device unit 80 flow down (so-called right-handed hitting).

A variable winning device 65 is arranged at the upper right of the front view of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won). That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, inside the variable winning device 65, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which the ball can pass are provided. The game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 flows down one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided with a probability change switch 65e3 in which a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a ball. The special discharge flow path 65e2 is in a state where it can pass only in the first round of the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the period during which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) and the special discharge passage for the ball in the first round of the jackpot. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is configured to be different depending on the game state and the jackpot type.

More specifically, the same operation pattern is set for the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the first round of the jackpot and the switching of the flow path in the variable winning device 65 after the start of the jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type. (See FIG. 7). On the other hand, the period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot (opening period) is changed according to the game state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. As a result, the period during which the specific winning opening 65a is open and the period during which the special discharge flow path 65e2 can flow down can be shifted or matched. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to play the game during the jackpot by paying attention to whether or not the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the game during the jackpot becomes monotonous. It can be prevented (suppressed).

Here, the configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side, and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first entry slot 631 side. It is configured to. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to let the game ball enter the second entrance 640 while hitting right, and the game method immediately shifts to left after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2. To. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is detected as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, since the game state set after the big hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the big hit game. .. The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be 0.2 seconds at the shortest. There is. In the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is in the range of 0.5 seconds to 0.7 seconds after the start of the jackpot and in the range of 3.5 seconds to 5.5 seconds. It operates and the flow path leading to the probability change switch 65e3 can pass through.

Next, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the problem can be detected at an early stage.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (15 for one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. (Prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the correspondence between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k in one jackpot and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the jackpot can be changed according to the game state at the time of the jackpot and the jackpot type. By doing so, the correspondence relationship between the period in which the specific winning opening 65a is open and the period in which the special discharge flow path 65e2 can flow down is changed. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (opening A and opening B) are provided as the opening period.

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the time-varying change of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a when the opening A and B are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before the start of the big hit. That is, before the start of the big hit, the ball can normally flow down to the discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off state continues for 0.5 seconds even after the jackpot starts (the opening period is reached). Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid is set to the ON state for 0.2 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A).

When the 0.2 second on state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off state again. The period of this off state continues until 3.5 seconds elapse from the start of the jackpot (until 2.8 seconds elapse after being set to the off state). Then, when the period of the off state elapses, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state again for 2 seconds (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass through), and thereafter, it is kept in the off state until the jackpot is completed. Dripping.

Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when the opening A is set, when the big hit starts, one round of the big hit starts after an opening period of 0.5 seconds. That is, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. By opening the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can enter the inside of the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, in one round of big hits, 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, or the open / close version 65f1 is set to the open state until one second elapses from the start of one round. Will be done. Since it is difficult to make 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a within 1 second, basically, in the first round of the jackpot, the opening / closing version 65f1 is opened for 1 second. When one round is completed, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and an interval period is set. After that, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated. In the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot, the open / close version 65f1 is set to the open state until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a or 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening A is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the 0.2 second on period of the flow path solenoid 65k. However, since there is a time lag before the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a reaches the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball is set to the ON state for 0.2 seconds. Is difficult to advance to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening A is set, the ball cannot reach the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, so that the low probability state of the special symbol is basically set after the big hit. Even when the opening A is started, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a at the same time as the start of the first round and the ball flows down the shortest distance, the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h Allows the ball to flow down into the special discharge channel 65e2 before the inlet of the special discharge channel 65e2 is blocked. Therefore, even when the opening A is set, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the probabilistic state.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, when the jackpot starts, one round of the jackpot is started after an opening period of 3.5 seconds, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. To. This open state continues for 1 second as in the case where the opening A is set, and when 1 second elapses, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed and the interval period is set. After that, the round period in which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened and the interval period are repeated in the same manner as the jackpot in which the opening A is set.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the opening B is set, the start timing of one round of the jackpot coincides with the start of the 2-second on period of the flow path solenoid 65k. That is, most of the balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Therefore, when the opening B is set, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. Therefore, as long as the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round, a special symbol is displayed after the big hit. It is possible to shift to the probabilistic state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (two types) of opening types are provided, and the ease of transition to the probabilistic state is different depending on the set opening type. The opening type is selected based on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is obtained in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set and the jackpot A or the jackpot C is obtained. If so, the opening B is set. That is, in the normal state, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, while when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached, the ball easily passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot type and play the game because it is easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol or it is difficult to shift depending on the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it is almost certain that the special symbol will shift to the probable change state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

Here, as a method of varying the rate of entry of the special symbol into the probable change state between the normal state and the non-normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is set according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. A different method is also conceivable. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and making the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round different according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to pass and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state is set. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, a method is also conceivable in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed due to the player making a mistake in the launching direction of the ball in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may feel dissatisfied.

Further, it is conceivable to make the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 different depending on the game state (whether or not it is the normal state), but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern do not have a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules will be deviated. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening period is selected according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot can be achieved in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time saving state). Then, it is in a state where it is easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, the game during the big hit can be performed with confidence.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 10) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first input. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball mouth 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. 2. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball into the ball entry port 640. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the ball entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the first hit random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 12A). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, If it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is added to the first hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored (see FIG. 12 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "1 to 10" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability (1 to 10). See FIG. 12 (a)). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "10/400".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit type is "big hit C". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit D". As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hits A to D) are determined according to the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) that the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (d). As shown in FIG. 13A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 13B) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 13C). And at least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 13D) are set.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 13B. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined respectively. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various fluctuation patterns of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 13 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for detachment (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

For the out-of-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of "0 to 149" for the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and various super reach out of the range of "150 to 197". (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 13D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203c.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second hit random number table (see FIG. 12C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set. , If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time of a higher probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability time (normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 12 (c)). By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there is one random value that is a hit of the normal symbol, and the hit is "0". This random number value is stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/240".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is "○". ”Is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 3 times". Will be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "1 second x 3 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the opening time The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 32) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and an opening selection table 202e is at least remembered.

The first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. Specifically, only "0" is defined as the jackpot judgment value in the low probability state of the special symbol, and 10 jackpot judgment values of "1 to 10" are defined as the jackpot judgment value in the high probability state (probability variation state) of the special symbol. Judgment value is specified. When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 12A), a special symbol is used. It is determined that it is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 12B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 12B, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". .. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 8 rounds like "big hit A". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit B", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). If the winning state of this "big hit B" is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set (that is, the ball presses the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If it becomes difficult to pass) and the winning state is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). Therefore, if the jackpot B is reached in the normal state, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the case where the jackpot A is reached in the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, "big hit C" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". ing. This jackpot A is a jackpot with 15 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the opening B is set (that is, the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round) regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The number of rounds is larger than the jackpot selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Therefore, the jackpot C is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit D" is associated and defined. This "big hit D" is a big hit with 15 rounds like "big hit C". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit D", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). If the winning state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set for this "big hit D" (that is, the ball presses the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If it becomes difficult to pass) and the winning state is other than the normal state, the opening B is set (that is, the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round). If this "big hit D" is won in a state other than the normal state, the number of rounds is large like the "big hit C", and the ball can easily pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. It will be advantageous for the person. On the other hand, if the ball is won in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the "big hit A" and the "big hit C".

In the normal state, the opening A is set when the "big hit D" is set, which is an irregular game in which the ball is launched (right-handed) aiming at the second entrance 640 in the normal state. This is to suppress the method. If the opening B is set even in the normal state when the lottery of the second special symbol is "big hit D" (that is, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit, the game When the probability change switch 65e3 can be easily passed regardless of the state), the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 50% (the opening A that is difficult to shift to the probability change state is set) of the first special symbol. There is a possibility that some players think that it is more advantageous to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in which the opening B is surely set in the case of a big hit than the lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state, when the big hit of the second special symbol is made in the normal state, the lottery of the first special symbol is made a big hit. As in the case of the situation, the opening A is set at a rate of 50%, which makes it difficult to shift to the probabilistic state. With such a configuration, by executing the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the irregular game method for improving the inrush rate in the probable change state from being established.

In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state. It may be configured as. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the deterrence against an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 12 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 12 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to. , It is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 13A to 13D) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the game state at the time when the jackpot is won in the case of a jackpot. Details of the opening selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the opening selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14, in the opening selection table 202e, the opening type corresponding to the jackpot type is defined for each game state at the time when the jackpot is won. Specifically, as the opening type determined when the jackpot A is reached, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state), and The opening B is defined in association with each of the normal symbol time-saving state) and the probabilistic state (probability-changing state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol). That is, when the jackpot A is reached, the opening B that facilitates the transition to the probabilistic state is read and set from the opening selection table regardless of the game state at the time of winning, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot B is obtained, the opening A is defined with respect to the normal state, and the opening B is associated with the time saving state and the probability change state, respectively. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached in the time saving state or the probabilistic state, the opening B is set so that it is easy to shift to the probabilistic state. Opening A is set, which makes it difficult to do. Therefore, if the jackpot B is obtained in the normal state, it is disadvantageous for the player.

As the opening type determined when the jackpot C is reached, the opening B is defined in association with the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state, respectively, as in the jackpot A. Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot D is obtained, the opening A is associated with the normal state and the opening B is associated with the time saving state and the probability variation state, respectively, as in the jackpot B. Has been done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the opening selection table 202e, the opening type is switched based on the type of the jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is obtained in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the opening A is set and the jackpot A or the jackpot C is obtained. If so, the opening B is set. That is, in the normal state, when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is reached, it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, while when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached, the ball easily passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the normal state, it is possible to pay attention to the jackpot type and play the game because it is easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol or it is difficult to shift depending on the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the big hit. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, it is almost certain that the special symbol will shift to the probable change state after the big hit, so that the player can be more satisfied.

Here, as a method of varying the rate of entry of the special symbol into the probable change state between the normal state and the non-normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is set according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. A different method is also conceivable. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and making the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round different according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to pass and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state is set. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, a method is also conceivable in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed due to the player making a mistake in the launching direction of the ball in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may feel dissatisfied.

Further, it is conceivable to make the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 different depending on the game state (whether or not it is the normal state), but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern do not have a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules will be deviated. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening period is selected according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot can be achieved in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time saving state). Then, it is in a state where it is easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, the game during the big hit can be performed with confidence.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second. Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, It has at least a probability variation effective flag 203o, a probability variation effective timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time reduction / medium counter 203r, a jackpot flag 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the second entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding). It has a fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that the same applies to the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S207 in FIG. 25).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S208 of FIG. 25, FIG. 27). See S405). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the fluctuation displayed on the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of balls (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 25). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S605 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S603: No in FIG. 29). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It indicates that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). Further, as described above, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 50 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S1202 in FIG. 35). Further, each time it is determined in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) that the variation time has elapsed, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S220 in FIG. 25). Further, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S1005 in FIG. 33).

The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start processing (see S302 in FIG. 26). Specifically, when the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 26, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 26, S213), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S508, S514, S519 in FIG. 28). Specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and if any of the counter values is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability time is used. While the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the table 202c, if the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are both 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time. A lottery will be held. Further, in the ordinary symbol variation processing, it is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol hits (see S514 and S519 in FIG. 28).

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1205 in FIG. 35). The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to on when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag is set. 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to turn on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1311 in FIG. 36). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1411 in FIG. 37). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (S1303 in FIG. 36). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be ON for 0.2 seconds when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, and when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, the flow path solenoid is set to ON. 65k is set on for 2 seconds (see FIG. 7). A counter value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the operation counter 203k when 0.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot, and it is set to 2 seconds when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot. The corresponding counter value is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1309 of the winning process (FIG. 36, S1014) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set.

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1405 in FIG. 37). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203n is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. Is set as. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203n (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1407 in FIG. 37). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, even after the first round of the jackpot set with the opening A is completed, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on for 2 seconds is estimated. It is possible to suppress fraud that causes the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegally assigned probabilistic state.

The probability change effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is the probability change switch based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass 65e3. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203o is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203p, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, while the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2, the ball can be illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, or the piano can be passed from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a game ball with a wire or the like to pass it, or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203q is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1411 in FIG. 37).

The time saving medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change state is not set after the big hit game, the time reduction state shifts to the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100 times.

The jackpot flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the value of the jackpot flag 203s is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203s becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1006 in FIG. 33). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1205 in FIG. 35). In the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25), the jackpot flag 203s is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 25).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is used to open and close the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) is shown. ) To determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). FIG. 16B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a probability change state flag 223e, a time saving state flag 223f, and a production counter 223g. , The power off flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area consisting of one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. There is. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start prize is won in the main control device 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. Therefore, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is a hold of the variation effect held by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (number of waiting times) up to 4 times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b determines the number of reserved balls as the type of the special symbol. It is designed to be managed every time.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is indicated. The ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is transmitted from the hold ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1708 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1702 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The probability change state flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol. The probability change state flag 223e is updated according to the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probability change state based on the probability change state flag 223e, and an effect (for example, change of the back surface type) is performed according to the determined game state.

The time saving state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving state flag 223f is updated according to the state command output from the main control unit 110 (see S1710 in FIG. 40). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time reduction state based on the time reduction state flag 223f, and an effect (for example, change of the back surface type) is performed according to the determined game state.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter that is referred to when various effects (back surface type, etc.) are selected. The effect counter 223g is composed of, for example, a loop counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 199”, and is updated one by one in the main process (see FIG. 39), for example. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an effect selection table in which the effect mode to be determined is associated with each value of the effect counter 223 g. By using the effect counter 223 g, various effects can be randomly selected and executed.

The power off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power off flag 223y is set to be turned on before the power off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power off process is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds). Therefore, when the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 38) (see 1508: Yes in FIG. 38), it is constant after the power cutoff flag 223y is set to on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the lapse of time (100 milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been erased, and unnecessary information (or information that has become incomplete due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there are cases, the information on the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1509 in FIG. 38). As a result, the processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, a time-lapse timer that measures the effect time, and the like. doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 has the address specified by the bus line 240 indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, while the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 43) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entry 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 43).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 18, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 18A. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 18 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 18 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 18 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternated. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 19B shows the back side A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back sides B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. .. Further, FIG. 20 shows the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 19, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table 222b and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", the MPU 231 corresponds to the back side. First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 20 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 20 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 19 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) excluding FIG. 20 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 20A to 20B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 20A and 20B) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 20 (b) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) is normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20 (b) to (c) and 20 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated and stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 6) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 27) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 22). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 22).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, in the example of FIG. 22). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 43) (see S2005 in FIG. 43). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 54 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 45B), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 45B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 45 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S3205 in FIG. 51) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 45 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 in FIG. 51). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3714 in FIG. 55). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S2306 in FIG. 45B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S3001 in FIG. 52 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S3709 in FIG. 55), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S3710 in FIG. 55). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 50 (a). ) S3002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3221 in FIG. 51), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S2705 in FIG. 47 (a), S2705 in FIG. 48 (a), S2805 in FIG. 48 (b). , See S2905 in FIG. 49). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the final display effect indicates an effect of stopping and displaying (confirming display) the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 51) (S3214 in FIG. 51), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S2505 in FIG. 47 (a), S2705 in FIG. 48 (a), S2805 in FIG. 48 (b), FIG. See S2905 of 49). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process shifts to S213.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (of the first special symbol). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery is acquired (S205), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S206).

If it is determined in the process of S206 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S206, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S206: Yes), the number of first special symbol reserved balls The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S207), and the hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S208). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S212 (S209), and the process is transferred to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S212 or S209, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213), and ends this process. The details of this special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A to D is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the red LED is turned on. , The green LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S216 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S217). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S217: Yes), the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S218), and the process proceeds to S223. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S218, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, it branches to S1001: Yes and the opening command is set. Is done (S1003). As a result, the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S217, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S219), and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. If there is (S219: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S219: No), the processing of S220 is skipped and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S221), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S221: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is set to 1. Subtract (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is 0 (S221: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S223. In the process of S223, a stop command is set (S223), and then this process is terminated. Although not shown, the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted by the processing of S220 becomes 0, or the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r subtracted by the processing of S222 becomes 0. , Set a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the game state has been changed.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S302). In the processing of S302, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probability variation state). judge. When it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol for high probability. Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 12A) one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "1 to 10" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first matches the random number values that hit these. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (it is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 12A), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value "0" stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b to determine what the jackpot type is. .. As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the big hit is A (8 round big hit). However, if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that the jackpot is B (8 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a big hit C (15 round big hit), and " If it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that the jackpot is D (15 round jackpot) (see FIG. 12B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 13A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 13A). Fluctuation time) is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the third symbol display device is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. As the stop type to be displayed in 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared. Time) is determined.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 32). Will be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various counters when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N1) is acquired ( S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not the ball has won a prize in the first entry port 64 (S401: No), or even if the ball has a prize in the first entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406), and the process shifts to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process as well, as in the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second entry port 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending numbers N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired ( S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entry port 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entry port 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S410). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S411, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. It is stored in the first free holding area (holding 1st area to holding 4th area) of the 2nd special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. .. In the processing of S412, as in the processing of S406, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the 640.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time reduction state, the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, in the processing of S508, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction state, and the value of either counter is determined. If also 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S509). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entering opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball trying to win the second specific winning opening 650a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible.

In the processing of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 12 (c)).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "1-239", it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 12 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S514), and if it is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S514: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S515). ). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S515, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 3 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, if the time saving state of the normal symbol is not (S514: No), the process proceeds to the process of S517. In the processing of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

In the process of S519, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S519), and the normal symbol is in the time saving state (that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, or the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is 1). If it is determined (S519: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203r are both 0) (S519: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this process ends. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 3 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S520 or the process of S521 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S522, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S518, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S518.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S525), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S516 or the process of S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol entry port 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S701) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S812 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S812 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S914 of FIG. 32, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S812). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. The main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 after transmitting the payout initialization command.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S833, S814) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S833, S814) of the RAM 203 is executed. .. In the RAM initialization process (S83, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814).

After the processing of S814 is completed, the processing is shifted to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S810 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) and the start winning process (see FIG. 27) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (256 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened for each round of jackpots, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won a prize. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S904) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S517 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 28) are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device is used when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S520 or the process of S521 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 28) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S908: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process is shifted to S901, and each process after S901 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S909: No), until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 30 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S912 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmit (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S914), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 31). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 32). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, if the processing of S215 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1001, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001: Yes), from the opening selection table 202e (see FIG. 14), the current jackpot type and the opening type according to the current gaming state are selected. Determine (S1002). Then, an opening command for notifying the determined opening type is set (S1003). As described above, when the opening A is set as the opening type, it becomes difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that it becomes difficult to set the probability change state as the gaming state after the big hit. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the ball easily flows down into the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the probability change state is easily set as the game state after the big hit.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect. After the processing of S1003, the start of the operation pattern of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 7) is set (S1004). Next, the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r are reset to 0 (S1005), the jackpot flag 203s is set to ON (S1006), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot of the special symbol (S1001: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1007). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1007, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1007: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1007, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1007: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1008), and if it is the start timing of a new round (S1008: Yes). ), The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

On the other hand, in the process of S1008, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1008: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010). Specifically, when the special game state (all rounds of the jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

If it is determined in the process of S1010 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: Yes), the ending command is set (S1011), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1010, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1010: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the current jackpot (special game state) (S1012). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect. In the processing of S1012, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the big hit (special game state) (S1012: No), the winning processing for performing the processing according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is performed. Execute (S1014). The details of this winning process (S1014) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After the winning process (S1014) is completed, an abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is normally discharged is executed (S1015), and this process is performed. finish. Details of this abnormality processing (S1015) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1012: Yes), then the jackpot end process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (S1013), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this jackpot end processing (S1013) will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1009). This jackpot operation setting process (S1009) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the large opening ports (first large opening port 65a, second large opening port 650a) according to the number of rounds. ) And the operation of the distribution rotating body 661.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S1101), the opening of the large opening port 65a is set (S1102), and this processing is completed. To do. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 34), the opening pattern according to the jackpot type can be accurately set.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1013) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1013). This jackpot end process (S1013) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot end.

In this jackpot end process (S1013), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so 50 is set in the value of the probability variation counter 203g. By doing so, the probability change state is set 50 times after the big hit (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203r is set to 100 (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the processing of S1204, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the game status after the end of the jackpot is issued from each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving / medium counter 203r updated in the processing of S1202 or S1203. Set (S1204). Next, both the jackpot flag 203s and the probability variation setting flag 203h are set to off (S1205), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 35), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1014). This winning process (S1014) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In this winning process (S1014), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is valid (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). In the process of S1301, if it is not the round validity period (S1301: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the current round validity period is (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S1302). If the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is detected (S1302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j to update (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, in the process of S1302, if the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not detected (S1302: No), the processing of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304), and if the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1306. On the other hand, in the processing of S1304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S1304: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1305), and if the round time has elapsed, it is determined. (S1305: Yes), the process proceeds to S1306.

In the processing of S1306, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set (S1306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. Further, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less in the processing of S1304 (S1304) and the round time has not elapsed in the processing of S1305 (S1305: No), S1306, and The process of S1307 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1308.

In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308), and if the value of the operation counter 203k is 1 or more (S1308: Yes), 1 is added from the value of the operation counter 203k. Subtract (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 in the process of S1308 (S1308: No), then it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1316). In the process of S1316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S1316: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the probabilistic valid flag 203o is on (S1316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p (S1317), and then the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 2 seconds) is determined (S1318). Then, if the value of the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S1318: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1310, and the process of monitoring the probability change switch 65e3 and updating the probability change setting flag 203h is executed. As a result, if the probability change effective timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change state can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change switch 65e3 from being improperly passed the ball and being given the probability change state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S1318: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203o is set to off (S1319), the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203p is reset (S1320), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of S1310, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed the probability change switch 65e3 (S1310), and if the sphere has not passed the probability change switch e3 (S1310: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1313. On the other hand, if the sphere has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change passage counter 203i (S1311), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1312), and S1313 processing is performed. Move to.

In the process of S1313, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313), and if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S1313: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1313: Yes), the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to off (S1314), the probability change enable flag 203o is set to on (S1315), and this End the process.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1015) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1015). This abnormal processing (S1015) is a processing executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 33), and as described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is normally discharged. It is a process for determining whether or not it has been done.

In the abnormal processing (S1015), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is valid (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B) (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203q (S1403), and the process proceeds to the process of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1404: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1404: Yes), the ball brushing period is in progress, so 1 is added to the value of the remaining ball timer 203n to update (S1405). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) (S1406), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S1406: No), the book is used as it is. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S1406: Yes), then the total number of discharges (the value of the probability variation pass counter 203i and the value of the discharge number counter 203q). It is determined whether or not the winning number (value) matches the winning number (value of the winning number counter 203j) (S1407).

If it is determined in the process of S1407 that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items do not match (S1407: No), an error command is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to the process of S1409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the special discharge flow path 65e2 is closed, it is possible to suppress the illegality of illegally entering the ball into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and passing it through the probability change switch 54e3.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items and the number of winning items match (S1407: Yes), the process of S1408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S1410). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S1411), and this process is terminated.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 37), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not normally discharged due to the clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 or the like. It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of such a problem at an early stage.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1616 (see FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1613 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1616. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1616 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1616. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1616 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is judged to be normal (S1503: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S1508. ..

If the power-off processing flag is on in the processing of S1502 (S1502: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1616. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S1505). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

In the process of S1505, if the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1505: Yes). S1506), the process shifts to S1508. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. .. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff flag 223y is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1616 is executed (see S1615 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process of S1616 is executed, the process of S1508 is reached at the moment when the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is a case where the power failure is started after the power failure of S1616 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1509) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

After the processing of S1510, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are updated according to the notification content of the state command set in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (S1511). .. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time the power is turned on. After the processing of S1511, interrupt permission is set (S1512), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1504 to S1506 is followed by S1508. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S151 to S1512 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1509 is that when the processing of S1508 is reached via the processing of S1504 to S1506, the processing of S1504 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the process of S1601, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1602 to S1610 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1611 and the variation display setting process of S1612 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1611 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the process of S1602 to S1612 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1601: Yes). S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1605 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1607 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1609, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of S1611. In the process of S1611, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1611). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1612). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the processing of S1612 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1613). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S1613 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1613: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are both set to ON (S1615), and the power is supplied. The disconnection process is executed (S1616). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1617), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1614), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1614: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1614: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1611) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1611). This command determination process (S1611) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1701). In the process of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1702), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S1703), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1704, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1707). .. Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1707: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (Number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) or the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e (number of holdings of variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted and this Is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1708). Further, in the process of S1708, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1708 is completed, this processing is completed.

Here, the hold ball number command is issued from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1708 as the main control device 110. It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Even if it deviates from the value, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning prize is detected or the special symbol is drawn, and the first special symbol holding ball counter of the main control device 110 is corrected. It can be adjusted to the values of 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. When the process of S1708 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S1707: No), then it is determined whether or not the state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1709). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S1709: Yes), the values of the probability change state flag 223e and the rotation position storage area 223f are updated according to the received command (S1710). That is, when the probability change state is notified based on the information according to the game state (whether or not it is the probability change state) included in the state command, the probability change state flag 223e is set to on and the time saving state is notified. If this is the case, the time saving state flag 223f is set to on, and when the normal state is notified, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are set to off. As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1709: No), then whether or not the jackpot related command (any of the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command) has been received. Is determined (S1711). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (S1711: Yes), the jackpot-related command is determined, the jackpot-related process for executing the corresponding control is executed (S1712), and this process is terminated. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1711, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (S1711: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1713), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S1713, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the jackpot-related process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this jackpot related process (S1712).

In the jackpot-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1801), and if the opening command has been received (S1801: Yes), the display opening command is set (S1802). The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. When the processing of S1802 is completed, the main jackpot related processing (see FIG. 41) is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1803). Then, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1803: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S1804), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number. (S1805). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S1805, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S1803: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1806). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1806: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1807), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1806: No), this process ends as it is. By executing this jackpot-related processing, appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the jackpot.

Next, the variation display setting process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1612). This variation display setting process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In the process of, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905), and the processing shifts to S1906. In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is displayed. Finish the setting process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S1907), and then the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). In, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908). Next, the display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S1908 (S1909), and this process is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Will be done.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 56. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 43) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 43) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 50, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2102 and S2102, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 43. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, then, the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 54 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. The determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation effect of the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c) is displayed. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50.

In the display setting process (S2303), one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. Specificly specify the content of the image. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), which are determined in the task process (S2304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, front / back out, etc. The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete deviation) is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed to display the image of S2304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer Initialize 233f to 0 (S2504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2505), and this process ends.

By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)), in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504 is updated, and the display data table buffer 233d is changed by the process of S2501. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S2502 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is obtained. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a stop type command for display (S2406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to the process of S2601.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) is supported. The stop type table is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S2603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S2408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 48A. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S2703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S2412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2903). S2904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S2905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command process, first, by setting the back image change flag 233w to on, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) is notified of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the bits constituting the back image discrimination flag 233x, the bit corresponding to the back type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the bits corresponding to the other back types are set to off (S3002). ), The rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the rear image after the change is changed from each bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S3002. Specify the image type. When the specified back image type is back B to E, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S2304), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to E according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S3002 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

In this embodiment, a lottery (determination) is performed to determine whether or not to change the back type when executing the variable display. Since the fluctuation display is set to a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, 2 is set in the command buffer area. The above back image change command should not be stored, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise etc. and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as the back image change command. .. In the process of S3202, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. In the processing of S2414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S3102), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3302 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2416 (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2418), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

In the processing of S2401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type commands are extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S3202 to S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3202), S3203 to S3204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3301).

In the task processing (S2304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are obtained for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 51. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3205.

In the process of S3205, the pointer update process is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3401, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3403), and if it is a demo display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3403: No). S3406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 51 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag 233z is on. (S3209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag 233z is off (S3209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is displayed in the data table buffer 233d. (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the confirmation display flag 233z is on (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag 233y is on (S3216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are cleared by setting the table buffer 233d (S3217) and then writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demo display flag 233y indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. ..

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S3216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S3216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is performed as it is. It ends and returns to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the image (one of FIGS. 18B and 18C) to be stopped and displayed, is set in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the details of the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3501 (S3501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It means that the data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Further, as a result of the processing of S3601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3603.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 45 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 45 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 50) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 51 to 53) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3702), and if it is the transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705.

Further, in the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

In the process of S3706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S3706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3707. Further, as a result of the processing of S3705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3707.

In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3709).

If the rear image change flag 233w is on (S3709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S3710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the bit in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the bit in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). ) Is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

In the process of S3709, if the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S3709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233w in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the rear surface A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the normal video RAM 236 is resident. There is no image data to be transferred to. Therefore, in the process of S3711, if the bit in the ON state is the bit corresponding to the back surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The discrimination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3713 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 (S3801). That is, in the processing of S3801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S3802 (S3803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a plurality of (two types) of opening types are provided, and it is easy to shift to a probabilistic state according to the set opening type (1 jackpot). The ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2) is different. More specifically, the opening A in which the probabilistic state is difficult to be given (the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is low) and the probabilistic state is more likely to be given than the opening A (entry into the special discharge flow path 65e2). Opening B (which has a high ball rate) can be set. The opening type is selected based on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot. More specifically, the opening A is set when the jackpot B or the jackpot D is reached in the normal state, and the opening B is set when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached. There is. That is, when the jackpot is B or the jackpot D in the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes low during the jackpot (it becomes difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3), while the jackpot A or the jackpot When it becomes C, the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes high during the big hit (it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the jackpot A or the jackpot C, which has a high ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2, will be obtained.

On the other hand, in a state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the opening B is set for all jackpot types. That is, if a big hit occurs in a state other than the normal state, the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 becomes high during the big hit (it becomes easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, it is possible to play a game in each game state with the expectation that a big hit will be made before the end of the probability change state or the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a feeling of tension that it is necessary to win the jackpot within the limited number of lottery of special symbols (the number of probable changes or the number of time reductions). Also, as expected, if a big hit occurs within the limited number of lottery, the opening B will be set without fail, so there is a sense of security that the transition to the probable change state will be almost confirmed when the big hit occurs. Can be embraced.

Here, as a method of varying the rate of entry of the special symbol into the probable change state between the normal state and the non-normal state, the opening pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round is set according to the jackpot type instead of the opening period. A different method is also conceivable. More specifically, for example, by fixing the opening period of the jackpot to 0.5 seconds and making the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in one round different according to the jackpot type, the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. A jackpot type that makes it easier to pass and a jackpot type that makes it difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 are provided. Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the normal state, the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is selected, and the state other than the normal state is set. If a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in, a method is also conceivable in which the big hit type in which the opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set is not selected. However, in this configuration, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed due to the player making a mistake in the launching direction of the ball in a state other than the normal state (a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed). In addition, if it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is set. Therefore, in this case, the player may feel dissatisfied.

Further, it is conceivable to make the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 different depending on the game state (whether or not it is the normal state), but if the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern do not have a one-to-one correspondence, the game rules will be deviated. There is a possibility that it cannot be installed in the hall.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening period is selected according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot can be achieved in a state advantageous to the player (probability change state and time saving state). Then, it is in a state where it is easy to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round. With such a configuration, even if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol in a state advantageous to the player, the game during the big hit can be performed with confidence.

In the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state in the first round of the jackpot so that the ball can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. The number of rounds that can enter the road 65e2 is not limited to the first round, and may be arbitrarily determined. In the rounds other than the first round, as a method of changing the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 using the opening A and B, for example, the opening / closing plate 65f1 in each round up to the round in which the ball can be entered. The opening time of is constant. That is, as in the case of the first round of the first embodiment, for example, the end condition of each round is defined as "from the start of the round until 2 seconds have passed as the specified time, or until 10 balls have entered as the specified number". You just have to keep it. In other words, by setting a specified time (2 seconds) in which it is practically difficult to insert a specified number (10) of balls, each round can be surely continued until the specified time elapses. It may be configured. Then, the drive timing of the flow path solenoid 65k may be specified in consideration of the specified time of each round and the interval period. With this configuration, it is possible to decide in a later round whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state. Therefore, in the jackpot game, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state for a longer period of time.

In the present embodiment, the opening B is set when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state, but the opening A is set even when the "big hit C" is reached in the normal state. You may. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the deterrence against an irregular game method in which the player always strikes right in an attempt to execute the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, the opening A for starting the first round in a period in which it is almost impossible for the ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and the period in which the ball can be easily passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Although it was configured to provide two types of opening B to start the first round, the opening type is not limited to two types. For example, the period of the first round may be configured to provide an opening type that overlaps a part of the 2 seconds in which the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the ON state.

In the present embodiment, two types of entrances are provided, that is, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but the entrance may be only the first entrance 64. That is, it may be configured so that only the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed. Even with this configuration, the opening B is set for both jackpots A and B in the probabilistic state, so it is possible to easily enter the ball into the probabilistic entry ball opening in the first round of the jackpot won in the probabilistic state. it can. With this configuration, the second entry port 640 can be deleted, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 72. In the first embodiment described above, by determining the opening type according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, a high probability state of a special symbol is given for each gaming state (special in the jackpot). The ball entry rate into the discharge flow path 65e2) was different. More specifically, in the normal state, the probability change state is given at 50% regardless of whether the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit or the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit ( Opening B, which increases the rate of entry into the special discharge flow path 65e2, is determined at a rate of 50%). Even if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, 100% of the probability variation state is given (100% of the opening B at which the ball entry rate into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is high is determined). As a result, even if the player accidentally enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in a state other than the normal state and becomes a big hit, the rate at which the probability change state is given is increased. It was able to be kept the same as the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to further diversifying the correspondence between the jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot and the determined opening type, the type of the time saving state is also different. There is. Then, if the jackpot won in the normal state can pass the ball through the probability change switch 65e3, in addition to the jackpot, the next jackpot is also given a high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot is relatively). It realizes a novel gameplay (three times in a row in a short period of time).

More specifically, it is configured to go back and forth between four game states (normal state, time saving state, latent state, and probability change state) triggered by a big hit or the like. Of these, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) and the probability variation state (high probability state of the special symbol and high probability state of the normal symbol) are the special symbol. Since the high probability state is set, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be hit again at short intervals, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot probability is low in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol and high probability state of the normal symbol). Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Of the two advantageous types of gaming states (latent state and probable change state), the latent state is more advantageous to the player. That is, as will be described in detail later, when a jackpot is reached in the latent probability state, the latent probability state is basically set again or the probability change state is set after the jackpot. Therefore, in either case, an advantageous state with a high jackpot probability is set. In addition, the rate at which the latent state is set again (looping the latent state) is higher than the rate at which the state shifts to the probable change state. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the probabilistic state, it may shift to the time saving state in addition to the latent probable state and the probable change state. In addition, the rate of transition to the time saving state is higher than that of the other two gaming states. Therefore, the gaming state set after the jackpot is hit in the latent state is basically advantageous to the player, but when the jackpot is hit in the probability changing state, the time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set. The ratio is high. Therefore, the latent state is more advantageous. As described above, in the second embodiment, the state transition is diversified and the player's interest is improved by providing a plurality (two types) of gaming states having different degrees of advantage.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the lottery result of the special symbol is a part (small hit) of the game board 13. A small hit winning device 650 is provided so that a ball can be entered in the case of a ball, a point that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and a main control. The point is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the apparatus 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, the small hit winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the front view of the first ball opening 64. A horizontally long rectangular small hit winning opening 650a is provided in a substantially central portion of the small hit winning device 650 so that a ball can enter the inside of the small hit winning device 650. When the ball enters the prize device 650 for small hits, 10 prize balls are paid out. Further, the small hit winning opening 650a is normally closed, and is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "small hit", which is one aspect of the deviation. This small hit is selected when it is out of the latent state (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of normal symbol) provided as one of the gaming states in the second embodiment. It becomes easy to be done. Since the small hit is an aspect of the loss, the gaming state does not change before and after that.

Although the details will be described later, in the latent state of the second embodiment, when a big hit of a special symbol is made, the opening B is always set regardless of the big hit type (the ball can easily set the probability change switch 65e3). This is the most advantageous condition (which allows passage). However, since it is a low-probability state of a normal symbol, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Therefore, in the latent state, it is necessary to play a game (left-handed) aiming at the first entrance 64 in order to draw the first special symbol. That is, it is necessary to play the game in the same game method as in the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. Under this circumstance, if the control is the same as in the normal state until the big hit, the number of balls held will decrease steadily before the big hit, even though the state has shifted to the advantageous latent state. Become. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the latent state, it is easy to make a small hit. That is, since the small hit winning opening 650a is easily opened, a ball that hits the left and does not enter the first entry opening 64 can easily enter the small hit winning opening 650a. Therefore, the prize ball given by the entry of the ball makes it possible to execute the game in the latent state without reducing the number of balls held. The small hit winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 2 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are entered) every time a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the launch direction notification effect will be described as an example of the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. This launch direction notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the direction in which the ball should be launched.

Here, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball (the entry port to be aimed at in order to draw a special symbol) differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the normal state and the latent state, which are set to the low probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than that in the time saving state, and the opening period when the normal symbol is hit is shortened. The fluctuation time of a normal symbol becomes long. Therefore, even if the ball is launched aiming at the second entry port 640, it is almost impossible to let the ball enter the second entry port 640. For this reason, in the normal state or the latent state, it is better to hit the ball into the first ball opening 64 by hitting the left ball and execute the lottery of the first special symbol than to hit the ball right. It is advantageous for the player (the consumption of the ball held can be kept low and the game can be played efficiently).

On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the opening period when the normal symbol is hit is longer, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened. Therefore, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, by playing a game aiming at the second entrance 640 by hitting right, a lottery for the second special symbol is drawn without reducing the number of balls held. Can be executed. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit right than to hit left.

In the second embodiment, the launch direction of the ball, which is advantageous for the player, can be notified by the launch direction notification effect. By executing this launch direction notification effect, it is possible to easily make the player understand the launch direction for efficiently performing the game, and it is possible to notify the player of the current game state. .. That is, when a left-handed hit is suggested, the gaming state is a normal state or a latent state, and when a right-handed hit is suggested, the gaming state is a probable change state or a time-saving state. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the current gaming state according to whether or not the ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot and the content of the launch direction notification effect. In this embodiment, the launch direction notification effect is not executed immediately after the jackpot ends, but until a specific condition is satisfied (after the jackpot, until the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). It is configured to avoid (delay) the execution of the launch direction notification effect. With such a configuration, the player cannot specify the current gaming state at least until the specific condition is satisfied, so that the expectation that the advantageous state is set is maintained. Can be embraced.

FIG. 58 (a) shows the third symbol during the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the launch direction notification effect (after the jackpot, no ball has entered the left and right through gates 67). It is a figure which showed an example (avoidance effect) of the display mode displayed on the apparatus 81. This avoidance effect and the launch direction notification effect described above are basically executed after the end of the jackpot when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed as a display mode in the period (avoidance period) from the start of the jackpot to the first passage of the ball through the through gate 67. The balloon 714 is displayed on the right side of. The balloon 714 is displayed from the small area Ds2 to the small area Ds3, and the characters "Aim at the through gate !!" are displayed inside the balloon 714. As a result, the player can shoot the ball at either of the through gates 67 provided on the left and right sides of the game board 13. It should be noted that the condition "until the ball first passes through the through gate 67" is set until it hits the normal symbol and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. This is because there is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed. More specifically, the advantage of right-handed hitting in a high-probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol compared to left-handed is that the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is won by a lottery of a normal symbol. This is because the 640a is opened and it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides, the lottery of ordinary symbols can be equally performed regardless of whether the machine is hit right or left, so that the ball enters the through gate 67. There is no difference in the degree of advantage between right-handed and left-handed until the ball hits the normal symbol. Therefore, during the period when there is no difference in the degree of advantage, the player's expectation for shifting to the most advantageous latent state is further increased by configuring the configuration to avoid (delay) the execution of the launch direction notification effect. It can last for a long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58 (b), a display mode of the launch direction notification effect executed when the latent state is given after the big hit will be described. As described above, the launch direction notification effect is executed when the avoidance period ends (after the jackpot, it is detected that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67). As shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67 after the big hit in the latent state, it is displayed from the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The characters inside the balloon 714 are changed to the characters "Instinctively rush !! Left-handed !!". In addition, the display mode is set as if the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the state has shifted to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the game can be efficiently performed by executing the left-handed hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (a), a display mode of the launch direction notification effect executed when the probability change state is given after the big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the sphere first passes through either the left or right through gate 67 after the big hit in the probabilistic state, it is displayed from the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. The character inside the balloon 714 is changed to the character "Please hit right". Further, the shape of the balloon 714 is a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state has shifted from the latent state to the unfavorable probability change state. In addition, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the game can be efficiently performed by executing the right-handed hit.

As described above, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds. Therefore, even if the through gate 67 is passed by left-handed strike, the launch direction notification effect shown in FIG. 59 (a) is executed, and the normal symbol is hit, the normal symbol fluctuates for 3 seconds. By hitting right inside, the ball can reach the second entrance 640 at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. Therefore, the expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer time without causing a loss to the player.

In the second embodiment, the fluctuation of the normal symbol executed by the ball passing through the through gate 67 during the jackpot continues to be executed after the end of the jackpot, or the normal symbol held during the jackpot. In order to prevent (suppress) the reserved ball from being digested after the jackpot, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, 0.5 seconds). It is configured. With this configuration, even if the through gate 67 is passed during the jackpot, the fluctuation ends immediately, so that it is possible to make it difficult to store the reserved balls of the normal symbol. Therefore, at the end of the big hit, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0 and the variable stop state is reached.

If the change of the normal symbol of the hit is being executed or held at the end of the big hit, the player loses if the avoidance period is set even though the second entrance 640 is opened. It ends up. Therefore, there is a risk that the player may feel dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low probability state is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the possibility that the reserved ball of the normal symbol exists at the end of the big hit is reduced. As a result, even if the avoidance period is set (even if the launch direction notification effect is not executed until the first detection of the ball entering the through gate 67 after the big hit), it is difficult for the player to feel dissatisfied. it can. Therefore, the launch direction notification effect can be executed more effectively.

In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low probability state, the ending effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting to the player to stop the launch of the ball during the ending period of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the fluctuation of the normal symbol of the hit is being executed or the fluctuation of the normal symbol is suspended at the end of the jackpot, so that the launch direction notification effect can be executed more effectively. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), a latent return effect, which is one aspect of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described. This latent probability return effect is an effect that is executed when the state changes from the probability change state to the latent state without going through the jackpot. Here, the case of shifting from the probabilistic state to the latent probable state without going through the jackpot is the case where the number of time reductions set in the probable change state is completed. Specifically, when a probabilistic state (a high-probability state of a special symbol and a high-probability state of a normal symbol) is set in the present embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends in 50 times. Therefore, if a big hit is not obtained before the lottery of the special symbol is completed 50 times after the probability change state is set, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol and low of the normal symbol). Probability state). The latent probability return effect is an effect executed at the time of transition from this probability change state to the latent probability state.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the latent probability return effect is executed, the characters inside the balloon 714 displayed from the small area Ds2 to Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 become "latent probability". It changes to the character "Return !! Left-handed !!". In addition, the display mode is set as if the eyes of the boy character 710 are burning. With this display mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the most advantageous latent state can be restored.

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is completed, the launch direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the launch direction notification effect may be executed based on the fact that the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13 is passed first after the jackpot is completed. Then, during the avoidance period, the effect of suggesting that the through gate 67 on the left side is aimed at may be executed. With this configuration, when the game state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible to make the player perform a left-handed hit that makes it easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently. In addition, even if the game state after the big hit is in a probable state, if the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on passing through the through gate 67 on the left side is a win, the launch notification effect is confirmed and then the right side. Even if the electric accessory 640a is hit, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently is set before the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the player loses. You can play without having to play. In this case, during the ending period of the jackpot, the ending effect of a mode suggesting returning to the left-handed may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from being hit into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make the ball hit left before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can be less likely to lose.

Further, when the launch direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the small hit winning opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a in the final round of the big hit. Good. With this configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit the ball to the left (win) in the small hit winning opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left-handed strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the configuration so that the player is less likely to lose. In addition, instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated ball entry port (effect ball entry port) that triggers the execution of the launch direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the through gate 67 on the left side.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the ROM 202 in the second embodiment is provided with a small hit random number table 202f and a time saving type selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Has been done. In addition, the contents of the first type selection table 202b and the opening selection table 202e have been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of ROM 202 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the first type selection table 202b in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the second embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as in the first embodiment, the determination value for determining the hit type is stored for each type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the present embodiment, eight types of big hits, "big hit E" to "big hit L", are provided. Of these, "big hits E to H" are jackpot types that can be determined by the lottery of the first special symbol, and are jackpots with eight rounds. Each of these jackpot types is configured with a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot. Further, "big hits IL" are jackpot types that can be determined by lottery of the second special symbol, and are jackpots with 15 rounds. Each of these jackpot types also has a different combination of the game state, the determined opening type, and the time saving state type set after the jackpot. As a result, the pattern of going back and forth in the game state is diversified.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit E", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit E". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). The opening type determined according to the game state and the number of time reductions given will be described later.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 74", "big hit F" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit F", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit F". The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 89", "big hit G" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 15 are counter values that are "big hit G", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit G". The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit H" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 counter values are "big hit H", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit H". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

On the other hand, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, "big hit I" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit I", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit I". The probability (ratio) is 1/4 (25/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 74", "big hit J" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit J", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit J". The probability (ratio) is 1/2 (50/100).

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 89", "big hit K" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 15 are counter values that are "big hit K", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit K". The probability (ratio) is 3/20 (15/100). Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit L" is defined in association with it. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 counter values are "big hit L", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be "big hit L". The probability (ratio) is 1/10 (10/100).

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 and the like, but in the present embodiment, the combination of the opening type determined by using these eight types of jackpots and the type of the time saving state set after the jackpot is used. However, each is configured differently. As a result, the pattern of going back and forth in the game state is diversified.

Next, the opening selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. Similar to the first embodiment, the opening selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the jackpot type and the opening type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot when a jackpot is won. ..

As shown in FIG. 61, as the opening type determined when the jackpot E is obtained, the opening A is defined in association with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is defined for the latent state and the probable change state. It is specified in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot E is reached in the normal state or the time saving state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is reached in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot F is obtained, the opening A is associated with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening B is associated with the probability changing state. Has been done. Therefore, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, it is difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot F is reached in the probabilistic state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot G is obtained, the opening B is associated with the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state, and the opening A is associated with the probability changing state. Has been done. Therefore, if the jackpot G is reached in the probabilistic state, it becomes difficult for the high probability state of the special symbol to be given after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot G is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent state, the high probability state of the special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the opening type determined when the jackpot H is obtained, the opening A is associated with the normal state and the time saving state, and the opening B is associated with the latent state and the probable change state. ing. Therefore, if the jackpot H is reached in the normal state or the time saving state, it becomes difficult to give a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent probability state or the probability variation state, a high probability state of a special symbol is likely to be given after the jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

As shown in FIG. 61, with respect to the "big hits I to L" determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the "big hits E to H" is defined. Here, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by making the set opening type different according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio of the high probability state of the special symbol being given after the jackpot is set to the game state. It can be changed accordingly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the small hit random number table 202f newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. This small hit random number table 202f is a data table for determining whether or not it is a small hit when the lottery of a special symbol is missed, and a counter value (random number value) that becomes a small hit for each game state. Is stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, "0,11 to 399" is associated as a counter value (random value) that is a small hit in the latent probability state. Of the 400 counter values that the first random number counter C1 can take, 390 counter values are small hits, so if a special symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the probability of small hits is 39 /. It is 40 (390/400). Therefore, in the latent state, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed, a small hit is made with a high probability, and the ball can easily enter the small hit winning opening 650a. Therefore, in a latent state in which it is necessary to hit left, the prize ball given by entering the small hit winning opening 650a allows the player to play the game without reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state in which the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, the game can be enjoyed without worrying about the ball held. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the latent state of the player. On the other hand, in the normal state, the time saving state, and the probabilistic state, there is no counter value (random value) that is a small hit. Therefore, even if a lottery of special symbols is performed, it will not be a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the time saving type selection table 202g newly added to the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described. As for the time saving type selection table 202g, FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving type selection table 202g. The time reduction type selection table 202g is used to select the jackpot type and the number of time reductions according to the game state at the time of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot E is obtained, 50 times are associated with the time reduction state, the latent probability state, and the probability change state. As described above, when the jackpot E is reached in the time saving state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. Further, when the jackpot E is reached in the latent state and the probability variation state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol. It becomes a high probability state. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the latent state, the state shifts to the probabilistic state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the latent state. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is reached in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is looped. Further, for the normal state, the number of time reductions is not specified (that is, the number of time reductions is set to 0). As described above, when the jackpot E is reached in the normal state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. That is, when the jackpot E is reached in the normal state, the normal state is looped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, 50 times are associated with the probability change state as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot F is obtained. As described above, when the jackpot F is reached in the probability variation state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set. Will be. That is, when the jackpot F is reached in the probabilistic state, the advantageous probabilistic state shifts to the unfavorable time saving state. Therefore, if the jackpot F is reached in the probabilistic state, it is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, the number of time reductions is not specified for the normal state, the time reduction state, and the latent state. As described above, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol. Moreover, it becomes a low probability state of a normal symbol. That is, when the jackpot F is reached in the normal state, the time saving state, and the latent state, the state shifts to the latent state that is most advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, as the number of time reductions (time reduction type) given when the jackpot G is obtained, 100 times are defined in association with the time reduction state and the probability change state. As described above, when the jackpot G is reached in the time saving state and the probability variation state, the opening A in which it is difficult to give the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol. It becomes a high probability state of. That is, when the jackpot G is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped, and when the jackpot G is reached in the advantageous probability variation state, the time saving state is shifted to the disadvantageous time saving state. In addition, the number of time reductions is not specified for the normal state and the latent state. As described above, when the jackpot G is reached in the normal state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. It becomes. That is, it loops the normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot G is reached in the latent state, the opening B is set so that the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Become. That is, when the jackpot G is reached in the latent state, the latent state is looped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, 20 times are associated with the time saving state as the number of time saving times given when the jackpot H is obtained. As described above, when the jackpot H is reached in the time saving state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. Therefore, when the jackpot H is reached in the time saving state, the time saving state is looped. On the other hand, the number of time reductions is not specified for the normal state, the latent state, and the probable change state. As described above, when the jackpot H is reached in the normal state, the opening A in which the high probability state of the special symbol is difficult to be given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Will be. That is, it loops the normal state. Further, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent state and the probability variation state, the opening B in which the high probability state of the special symbol is easily given is set, so that the state after the jackpot is the high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol. It becomes a low probability state. That is, when the jackpot H is reached in the latent state and the probable change state, the most advantageous latent state is set.

As shown in FIG. 63, with respect to the "big hits I to L" determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as the "big hits E to H" is defined. Here, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions given after the jackpot is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, the advantageous jackpot type is different depending on the game state. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the player to have a different jackpot type depending on the game state, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, in the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a winning state storage area 203t and an initial ball entry flag 203s are added. Further, instead of the probability variation counter 203g in the first embodiment, the probability variation flag 203u is provided.

The winning state storage area 203t is a storage area for storing information according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In the second embodiment, the probability change flag 203u indicating whether or not the jackpot is in the probability change state at the start of the jackpot and the time reduction medium counter 203r indicating the remaining number of time reductions are reset. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot (when the number of time reductions is newly set), the state at the time when the jackpot is won cannot be specified from the values of the probability change flag 203u and the time reduction counter 203r. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the values of the probability change flag 203u and the time saving / medium counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t, and then these are reset (see S232 in FIG. 66). .. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined based on the information in the winning state storage area 203t, and the number of time reductions is selected from the time saving type selection table 202g (see S1212 in FIG. 69). With this configuration, the number of time reductions can be accurately set from the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

The probability variation flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. That is, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability variation number is limited to 50 times, but in the second embodiment, the probability variation number is indefinite. Therefore, instead of the probability variation counter 203g of the first embodiment, the probability variation counter 203u is provided, and if the probability variation flag 203u is on, a high probability state of the special symbol is provided, and if it is off, a low probability state of the special symbol is indicated. And said. This probability variation flag 203u is set to on if the probability variation setting flag 203h is on at the end of the jackpot (see S1211 in FIG. 69). It is also set to off at the start of the jackpot.

The first ball entry flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the avoidance period (a state in which the first ball has not been entered into the through gate 67) is set after the end of the jackpot. When the entry into the through gate 67 is detected while the initial entry flag 203s is on, the initial entry command is set from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 68). See S612). The voice lamp control device 113 executes a launch suggestion effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) when the first ball entry command is received and the special symbol is in a high probability state. .. The first ball entry flag 203s is set to on at the end of the jackpot (see S1214 in FIG. 69), and is set to off after setting the first ball entry command (see S613 in FIG. 68).

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the transition of the gaming state in the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the second embodiment, one of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent state, and the probability changing state is set with the end of the jackpot or the end of the time saving number of times. To. The normal state and the time saving state are disadvantageous to the player because the probability of becoming a big hit is low. Of these, in the time-saving state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and the game can be played efficiently by hitting right, so the time-saving state is more advantageous than the normal state. Become. On the other hand, the latent probability state and the probability variation state have a high probability of being a big hit and are likely to be a big hit continuously in a short period of time, which is advantageous for the player. Of these, in the latent state, since the opening B is set regardless of the jackpot type, it is more advantageous for the player than the probabilistic state in which the opening A is set in a part of the jackpot. That is, the latent state is the most advantageous gaming state.

First, a method of shifting the gaming state in the normal state shown in the upper left of FIG. 65 will be described. This normal state is a gaming state that is set when the initial setting of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and is basically a gaming state in which the pachinko machine stays for the longest time. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 65, in the normal state, another gaming state may be set with a big hit as a trigger. Specifically, when the jackpot F is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and the time saving period is not given (Fig. 61). 63), the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that the latent probability state is set after the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of another jackpot type (big hits E to H) that can be determined by the special symbol lottery, the opening A in which it is difficult to allow the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 is determined (FIG. 61). (Refer to), since the time saving period is not given (see FIG. 63), the normal state is basically set again after the big hit. Even when the jackpot F is obtained, the normal state is set when the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball is not launched in the first round. On the contrary, even when the jackpot is E to H, when the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the state shifts to the latent probability state after the jackpot.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state in the latent state shown in the interruption of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the interruption of FIG. 65, even in the latent state, there is a possibility that another gaming state may be set with the jackpot as a trigger, as in the normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot E is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), and 50 time reduction periods are given. Therefore (see FIG. 63), when the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the probability change state is set after the big hit. That is, it falls (ranks down) to a state where the degree of advantage is small. On the other hand, when it becomes another jackpot type (big hit F, G, H), the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is not given (see FIG. 63), so that the ball is a probability change switch during the jackpot. By passing through 65e3, the latent state is set again after the big hit. That is, it loops the most advantageous latent state for the player. As described above, the latent state is an extremely advantageous state because the opening B is always set when a big hit occurs and the same state is looped at a rate of 75%. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball is not launched in the first round of the jackpot E, the time is shortened after the jackpot. Similarly, if the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 in the first round of the jackpots F, G, and H, it falls to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state in the probabilistic state shown in the lower part of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the probabilistic state, not only the game state shifts to another game state triggered by the big hit, but also the game state shifts to another game state at a moment other than the big hit (when the number of time reductions ends). .. Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the big hits J and K are determined at a rate of 65%, it is difficult to let the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2. Is determined (see FIG. 61), and a time saving period of 50 times or 100 times is given depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 63), so that the time saving state basically shifts after the jackpot.

On the other hand, when the jackpot L is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is not given (Fig. 61). 63), the ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so that the latent probability state is set after the jackpot. That is, it is possible to return from the probabilistic state with a small degree of advantage to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, in the probabilistic state, if the set time saving period of 50 times can be passed (if the special symbol lottery is missed 50 times in a row), the latent probable state is the same as in the case of the jackpot L. Can be restored to. If it is possible to return to the latent state, the opening B is always set at the next big hit, which means that the number of big hits is substantially increased by at least one time. Therefore, by providing a route to return from the probabilistic state to the latent state, even if the player falls from the latent state to the probable state, the game is expected to return to the latent state again. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the probable state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot I is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61) and the time saving period of 50 times is given. (See FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot I is reached in the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is basically looped.

In this way, in the probability variation state, it is advantageous in that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state, but when it becomes a big hit, it shifts to the time saving state where the jackpot probability is low with a high probability (65%). Will end up. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the time saving period will end and the state will return to the latent state, rather than becoming a big hit. That is, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the game can be performed with the expectation that the lottery of the special symbol will be continuously lost. In addition, when the jackpots J and K are reached in the probabilistic state, it is possible to shift to the time saving state instead of shifting to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that after the loop of the latent state and the probabilistic state is completed. However, it can be motivated to continue the game at least until the end of the short period. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, a method of shifting the gaming state in the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65 will be described. As shown on the upper right side of FIG. 65, in the time saving state, not only the game shifts to another game state triggered by the big hit, but also at a moment other than the big hit (when the number of time saving ends). It shifts to the game state of.

Specifically, when the jackpot is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot is determined at a rate of 50%, the opening B is set (see FIG. 61), but the time saving period is short. Not granted (see FIG. 63). Therefore, when the jackpot J is reached in the time saving state, the state basically shifts to the most advantageous latent state. In addition, in the time saving state, when the time saving period ends, the state shifts to the normal state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot I, K, L is reached in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the opening A is set (see FIG. 61), and 20 times, 50 times, or 100 times depending on the jackpot type. (See FIG. 63). Therefore, after the jackpots I, K, and L won during the time saving state are completed, the time saving state is basically looped.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, there is basically no transition to the normal state, so when the time saving state is looped, the time saving period set as the time saving state ends. Until then, at least it can remind the player to continue the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the player shifts to the latent state after the big hit, the player can be greatly satisfied.

As described above, in the second embodiment, by changing the ratio in which the opening B is set according to the game state, the ratio in which the high probability state of the special symbol is given is changed according to the game state. There is. As a result, it is possible to provide a latent state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is basically given at a rate of 100% after the end of the big hit. As a result, when the jackpot F in the normal state shifts to the latent state, the jackpot F, the jackpot E in the latent state that shifts after the jackpot F, and the probability change that shifts after the jackpot E A total of three jackpots with J or K in the state will be guaranteed. Therefore, once the player is in the latent state, the player can be given a sense of security and satisfaction because the prize balls for at least three big hits are guaranteed.

In addition, since the latent state loops the same state with a high probability (75%) when it becomes a big hit, if it is possible to shift from the normal state to the latent state, the big hit and the big hit probability are high. The state is likely to be repeated. Therefore, since it is possible to expect the acquisition of a larger amount of prize balls, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, even if the player falls into the probabilistic state due to the jackpot E in the latent state, it can be returned to the latent state if the deviation can be continued 50 times in the probable state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it can be expected that the deviations will be continuous, so that it is possible to provide a novel playability.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. Similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) has a display mode of the first symbol display device 37 and a third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting the fluctuation pattern of.

Of the variation start processing 2 (S111) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S201 to S218 and S221 to S223, S201 to S218 and S201 to S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S221 to S223 is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S216 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and if it is a small hit, it is small. The small hit determination process for starting the hit is executed (S231), and the process shifts to S217. The details of this small hit determination process (S231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. Further, in the processing of S217, when the lottery result of this special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S217: Yes), the values of the probability change flag 203u and the time saving / medium counter 203r are stored in the winning state storage area 203t. (S232), the process shifts to S218. By holding the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t until the end of the jackpot, it is possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and set an appropriate time saving period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the small hit determination process (S231) described above will be described. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S241). In the process of S241, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S241: Yes), the start of the small hit is set (S242). That is, by setting the opening of the small hit winning opening 650a, it is set so that the ball can enter the small hit winning device 650. After the processing of S242, this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66). On the other hand, in the process of S241, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a small hit (S241: No), the process of S242 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is.

By executing this small hit determination process (see FIG. 67), the small hit winning opening 650a can be frequently set to the open state in the latent state. Therefore, since the ball holding can be improved in the most advantageous latent state, the motivation of the player for the game in the latent state can be improved.

Next, the through gate passing process 2 (S112) will be described with reference to FIG. 68. The through-gate passing process 2 (S112) is a process executed in place of the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the through-gate passing process (see FIG. 29). This is a process for detecting the passage of a sphere to 67 and executing the corresponding control.

Of the through-gate passing processes 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, the processes S601 to S605 are the same as the processes of S601 to S605 of the through-gate passing processes (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the through gate passing process 2 (S112) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the first entry flag 203v is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S611). That is, it is determined whether the avoidance period is set after the jackpot ends, and if the first ball entry flag 203v is on (if it is the avoidance period), the first ball entry command is set (S612), and the first ball entry is performed. The flag 203v is set to off (S613), and the process shifts to S602. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the first ball entry flag 203v is off (S611: No), each process of S612 and S613 is skipped, and the process shifts to S602.

The first ball entry command set by the process of S612 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the execution of the launch direction notification effect on the condition that the special symbol is in the time saving state. After the end of the big hit, the game state set after the big hit is a latent state or a probable change state by avoiding the execution of the launch direction notification effect until the ball first passes through the through gate 67. It can be difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it can be expected that an advantageous latent state is set for a longer period of time.

Next, the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. The jackpot end process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 as in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 35). This is a process for setting the game state after the big hit according to the situation.

Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, the processing of S1201 and S1205 is the same as the processing of S1201 and S1205 of the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the jackpot end processing 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1201: Yes), then the probability variation flag 203u is set to on. Then (S1211), the process shifts to S1212. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1201: No), the processing of S1211 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1212.

In the process of S1212, the number of time reductions corresponding to the game state specified by the data stored in the winning state storage area 203t is read from the time reduction type selection table 202g, and the read value is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203r. (S1212). Next, the status command is set based on the values of the probability change flag 203u updated in each process of S1211 and S1212, and the time reduction / medium counter 203r.

The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f according to the game state notified by the state command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 2 (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1205 is completed, the first ball entry flag 203v is set to ON (S1214), and the main processing is ended. As a result, the avoidance period can be set after the jackpot ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 2 (S1621) executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the first embodiment. This command determination process 2 (S1621) is a process for determining a command received from the main control device 110, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

Of the command determination processes 2 (S1621) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S1701 to S1709 and S171 to S1713, S1701 to S1709 and S1711 of the command determination processes (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of ~ S1713 is executed.

Further, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the status command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S1709 (S1709: Yes), the content of the status command is changed. The state command process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S1721), and this process is terminated. Details of this state command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. Further, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received in the process of S1711 (S1711: No), then the first ball entry command is issued. If it is determined whether the ball has been received (S1722) and the first ball entry command has been received (S1722: Yes), the first ball entry process for setting the effect according to the current gaming state is executed (S1723). This process ends. The details of this initial ball entry process (S1723) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned state command processing (S1721) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. When this state command processing is executed, first, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read (S3901), and it is determined whether the probability change state flag 223e is on (S3902). In the process of S3902, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223e is on (S3902: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223f is on (S3903). Then, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is also on (S3903: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state notified by the current state command is the latent state (S3904).

In the process of S3904, when it is determined that the notified gaming state is the latent state (S3904: Yes), it means that the probabilistic state has returned to the latent state, so that the latent return effect (FIG. 59). By setting (see (b)), the player is notified that the player has returned to the latent state (S3905), and the process shifts to S3906. As a result, the player can be easily recognized that the state has changed from the advantageous probability change state to the more advantageous latent state, so that the player can be pleased.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223e is off in the processing of S3902 (S3902: No), or when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off in the processing of S3903 (S3903: No). If it is determined in the processing of S3904 that a gaming state other than the latent state has been notified (S3904: No), it is not a case of returning from the probabilistic state to the latent state, so the processing of S3905 is skipped and the processing is performed. It shifts to S3906.

In the process of S3906, the values of the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are updated according to the state command notified from the main control device 110, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-mentioned initial ball entry process (S1723) will be described. When this initial ball entry process (S1723) is executed, first, the probability change state flag 223e and the time saving state flag 223f are read out (S4001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read probability change state flag 223e is on (S4002), and if it is off (S4002: No), it is not the timing to execute the launch direction notification effect, so this process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 70).

On the other hand, in the process of S4002, when it is determined that the probability change state flag 223e is on (S4002: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving state flag 223f read in the process of S4001 is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is on (S4003: Yes), it means that the avoidance period has ended in the probable change state of the current gaming state. In order to execute the effect of notifying the right-handed stroke (see FIG. 59 (a)), the right-handed display effect command is set (S4004), and this process is terminated. The right-handed display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display right-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts the launch direction notification effect (see FIG. 59 (a)) in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the right-handed effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when it is determined that the time saving state flag 223f is off (S4003: No), it means that the current gaming state is in the latent state and the avoidance period has ended. Among the notification effects, the display left-handed effect command is set (S4005) in order to execute the effect of notifying the left-handed effect (see FIG. 58 (b)), and this process is terminated. The left-handed display command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display left-handed effect command, the display control device 114 starts the launch direction notification effect (see FIG. 58 (b)) in which the third symbol display device 81 notifies the left-handed effect.

By executing the first ball entry process (S1723) in this way, it is possible to notify the appropriate launch direction in which the player can efficiently play the game at the end of the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game efficiently.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured to provide four types of gaming states including two types of gaming states (probability variation state and latent probability state) that are advantageous for the player. Then, in the most advantageous latent state, it is configured so that it is possible to shift to another gaming state only by the big hit, and the transition destination is basically set to the probabilistic state. With this configuration, if it is possible to shift to the latent state, the high probability state of the special symbol will be set after the jackpot at least twice in a row, including the latent state, so for a short period of time. You can make multiple jackpots in a row. Therefore, since a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the probability change state is set again when the jackpot is set in the latent state or when the jackpot is set in the probability change state. It is configured to provide a case where it is done. That is, the number of consecutive big hits in the latent state is changed depending on the luck of the player. With this configuration, it is difficult to predict how many times the high-probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot will be repeated, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the second embodiment, even if the latent state is changed to the low-advantageous probabilistic state, a part of the jackpot (big hit I) and the latent probability when a short period of time elapses. It is configured so that it can return to the state. If it is possible to return to the latent state, it will be an advantageous state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit at least twice in a row, so that the player can be pleased. Further, in the second embodiment, in order to make it difficult to understand which gaming state the player has transitioned to when the player shifts to the latent state or the probable change state after the big hit, the game state (ball launch direction) is set. The execution of the notification effect (launch direction notification effect) is delayed from the end of the jackpot. More specifically, after the jackpot is finished, the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided until the ball first passes through the through gate 67, and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 first, the game is played. The configuration is such that the launch direction notification effect of the mode according to the state is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it unclear for a longer time whether it is in the latent state or the probabilistic state, so the game is expected to shift to the latent state for a longer time. Can be done.

Further, when the opening A is set (that is, disadvantageous) in the probability change state and the jackpot type (big hit J, K) is set, a time saving period is given after the jackpot. That is, when the loop of the high probability state (latent state, probability changing state) of the special symbol ends, it is configured so as not to fall to the most disadvantageous normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game at least until the end of the shortened time period, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, if a big hit occurs in a short time state, it basically does not fall to the normal state. In other words, if a big hit occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is basically looped or the state shifts to the latent state. Therefore, when the time saving state is looped, the player can be reminded to continue the game at least until the time saving period ends, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, when the state shifts to the latent state, the player can be greatly satisfied.

In the second embodiment, there is a high probability that a small hit will be made by lottery of a special symbol in the latent state, and a small hit will be made frequently. As a result, the ball holding in the latent state is improved, and the decrease in motivation of the player for the game in the latent state is suppressed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the latent state, the jackpot type with a large number of rounds may be easily determined. Specifically, for example, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol that is easy to be executed in the latent state, the big hit of 15 rounds is easy to be determined, while the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in the probable state is easily executed. In the lottery, the 8-round jackpot may be easily determined. With this configuration, in the latent state, it is easy to reduce the number of balls you have by hitting left, but there is a high probability that you will win a big hit, and if you hit a big hit, you will be able to win more prize balls. Even if the badness of possession is taken into consideration, it can be advantageous for the player. Further, by making it easy to select 15 rounds in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to let the player select a game method in which the player dares to hit left in the probabilistic state. That is, in a probabilistic state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a becomes long, a highly stable game of aiming for a big hit of 8 rounds without reducing the number of balls held by hitting right. By hitting left, the ball holding will be worse, but if you hit it, it will be easy to make 15 rounds. High gambling property (If you win with a small number of lottery, the profit will be large, but if you continue to miss, you may lose. ) It is possible to let the player select the playability. As a result, it is possible to provide a game that suits the taste of each player.

In the second embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol set after the big hit continues until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of probable changes may be limited to 100 times. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game with a sense of tension even in an advantageous latent state or probable change state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Further, in the second embodiment, any of 20, 50, and 100 times is set as the time saving period of the normal symbol, but the time saving period is not limited to this, and the time saving period may be arbitrarily set. Good. In addition, a configuration in which a short period of time continues until the next big hit may be made. Specifically, for example, when the probability variation state is set, the high-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol may continue until the next big hit.

In the second embodiment, the main control device 110 outputs the first ball entry command to the voice lamp control device 113, triggered by the detection of the first ball entry to the through gate 67 after the jackpot is completed. .. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the first ball entry command is configured to execute the launch direction notification effect according to the game state when the game state is the latent state or the probability change state, but this is limited to this. I can't. For example, in the case of the timing when the main control device 110 determines the game state and executes the launch direction notification effect (the passage of the through gate 67 is detected first after the big hit, and the game state is the latent state or the probability change. It may be configured to output the first ball entry command only in the case of the state). As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, the output frequency of the first ball entry command can be reduced. On the other hand, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the voice lamp control device 113 side determines whether or not the passage is the first time. , The current gaming state may be determined to determine whether or not to execute the launch direction notification effect. With this configuration, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to determine whether or not it is the first time, so that the capacity of the RAM 203 can be reduced by reducing the first ball entry flag 203v, and the processing of the main control device 110 can be performed. The load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the latent probability state or the probability change state is set after the big hit, the launch direction notification effect is executed when the ball first passes through the through gate 67. The execution condition of is not limited to this. For example, the launch direction notification effect may be executed when the normal symbol hits, or the launch direction notification effect may be executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). May be. In addition, by combining these, the launch direction notification effect is executed when either the normal symbol hits or the ball passes through the through gate 67 a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). It may be configured. Further, for example, the launch direction notification effect according to the game state may be executed after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the big hit. Further, for example, instead of providing an avoidance period, as a mode of the firing direction notification effect, after the big hit, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) is executed in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the direction to be fired. May be good. Here, examples of modes that are difficult for the player to see include, for example, a mode in which characters indicating the firing direction are initially displayed as fine characters, and the characters are enlarged with the passage of time. Even with these configurations, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the latent state is the latent state or the probabilistic state, as in the second embodiment, so that the player's expectation for the latent state can be maintained for a longer period of time. ..

In the second embodiment, as an effect during the avoidance period in which the execution of the launch direction notification effect is avoided (delayed), an effect of notifying the aiming of the through gate 67 is executed. The production mode during the period is not limited to this. For example, during the avoidance period, it may be notified to aim at the through gate 67 by left-handed regardless of the gaming state. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is prevented (suppressed) that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting right during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability change state is set as the game state, even if the left-handed hit is performed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the right-handed hit and the left-handed hit until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left-handed hit during the avoidance period, the player can efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent state or the probable change state.

In the second embodiment, the latent probability state and the probability variation state are provided as advantageous gaming states, and the latent probability state is set to the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probabilistic state may be configured to be most advantageous. Specifically, in the probabilistic state, the opening B is set for all jackpot types, and for example, a time saving period is given at a rate of 75% (that is, the probabilistic state is likely to loop). Configure to be). More specifically, for example, when the jackpot J, K, L (distribution 75%) is obtained in the probabilistic state, the opening B is set and the time saving period is given, resulting in the jackpot I (distribution 25%). In this case, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given (shifts to the latent state). On the other hand, in the latent state, the opening A may be set by the majority of jackpot types (for example, at a rate of 65%). More specifically, for example, in the jackpots F and G (distribution 65%), the opening A is set and a time saving period is given (that is, the person falls into the time saving state), and the jackpot E (distribution 25) is configured. %), The opening B is set and the time saving period is not given (that is, the latent state is looped), and in the jackpot H (distribution 10%), the opening B is set and the time saving period is set. It may be configured to be given (that is, to return to the probabilistic state). With this configuration, contrary to the second embodiment, the probabilistic state can be set to the most advantageous gaming state. Further, in this case, in the avoidance period after shifting to the latent probability state or the probability change state, the effect of notifying the left-handed strike may be executed. With this configuration, when the latent state is set as the game state, it is prevented (suppressed) that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting right during the avoidance period. can do. In addition, as described above, when the probability change state is set as the game state, even if the left-handed hit is performed during the avoidance period, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the right-handed hit and the left-handed hit until the normal symbol hits. Does not appear. Therefore, by executing the effect of notifying the left-handed hit during the avoidance period, the player can efficiently play the game regardless of whether the game state is the latent state or the probable change state. Furthermore, when a right-handed hit is notified when the ball enters the through gate 67, it means that the player has transitioned (or looped) to the most advantageous probability change state, so that the left-handed hit is once notified. By making the player think that he / she has transitioned (or looped) to the latent state, the joy of transitioning (or looping) to the probabilistic state of the player can be amplified.

In the second embodiment, based on the fact that the ball first passes through the through gate 67 after the jackpot is completed, which of the latent state and the probable change state is shifted to by the launch direction notification effect is determined. Although it is configured to notify the player, the notification timing of the game state is not limited to this. For example, when the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, the game state set at the end of the jackpot may be predicted from the value stored in the winning state storage area 203t and notified. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the game state at an early stage. Further, for example, the game state after the big hit may be notified during the predetermined round of the big hit (for example, the eighth round) or the ending effect of the big hit.

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot is completed, the launch direction notification effect is executed based on the fact that the ball first passes through either the left or right through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the launch direction notification effect may be executed based on the fact that the through gate 67 provided on the left side of the game board 13 is passed first after the jackpot is completed. Then, during the avoidance period, the effect of suggesting that the through gate 67 on the left side is aimed at may be executed. With this configuration, when the game state after the jackpot is in the latent state, it is possible to make the player perform a left-handed hit that makes it easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 even during the avoidance period. Therefore, it is possible to play the game efficiently. In addition, even if the game state after the big hit is in a probable state, if the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on passing through the through gate 67 on the left side is a win, the launch notification effect is confirmed and then the right side. Even if the electric accessory 640a is hit, a variation time of a length that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 sufficiently is set before the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the player loses. You can play without having to play. In this case, during the ending period of the jackpot, the ending effect of a mode suggesting returning to the left-handed may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from being hit into the specific winning opening 65a until the ending period, and to make the ball hit left before entering the avoidance period. Therefore, the player can be less likely to lose. Further, when the launch direction notification effect is executed only when the ball passes through the through gate 67 on the left side, the small hit winning opening 650a may be opened instead of the specific winning opening 65a in the final round of the big hit. Good. With this configuration, in the final round of the big hit, the player is allowed to hit the ball to the left (win) in the small hit winning opening 650a provided on the left side of the game board 13. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to make a left-handed strike before entering the avoidance period, it is possible to make the configuration so that the player is less likely to lose. In addition, instead of the through gate 67, a dedicated ball entry port (effect ball entry port) that triggers the execution of the launch direction notification effect may be provided in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as executing the launch notification effect triggered by the passage to the through gate 67 on the left side.

In the second embodiment, the latent state is the most advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the time saving state is more advantageous than the latent state. More specifically, for example, the difference between the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot probability in the low probability state is small (for example, 1/50 in the low probability state, high probability). The time is 1/49). Then, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit type with a small number of prize balls that can be obtained is increased (for example, "big hit α" and "big hit α" in which the number of rounds is one round. Beta ”can be determined), and if a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, the percentage of big hit types that can win a large number of prize balls will be high (for example, the number of rounds will be increased). 15 rounds of "big hit γ" and "big hit δ" can be determined). Then, when the "big hit α" is reached in the normal state in which the game is left-handed, the opening A is set and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, the jackpot type from which a large number of prize balls can be obtained is easily determined (the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed), and the time saving state is facilitated. On the other hand, when the "big hit β" is reached in the normal state, the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that the jackpot type with few prize balls can be easily determined (the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed) and the transition to the latent state can be easily performed. Further, in the time saving state in which the game is played by right-handed hitting, the opening A is set when the "big hit γ" is reached, and the time saving period of 100 times is set. That is, it is configured so that the most advantageous time saving state can be easily looped. On the other hand, when the time saving state becomes "big hit δ", the opening B is set and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that a relatively advantageous probabilistic state in which the game is played by hitting right is easily set. As a result, when a big hit is made in the time saving state, the time saving state or the probability change state in which the right-handed game is basically set is set, which is the most advantageous for the player. Further, when the "big hit δ" is reached in the probabilistic state, the opening B is set and the time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that a relatively advantageous probabilistic state in which the game is played by hitting right is easily looped. On the other hand, when the probability change state becomes "big hit δ", the opening B is set, but the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that a disadvantageous latent state in which the game is played by left-handed is easily set. As a result, the probabilistic state is advantageous in that the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, but it may shift to the unfavorable latent state after the big hit, so the advantage is lower than the time saving state. Can be done. Further, when the player becomes a "big hit α" in the latent state in which the game is played with a left-handed hit, the opening A is set and a time saving period of 100 times is given. That is, it is configured so that it can shift to the most advantageous time saving state. On the other hand, when the "big hit β" is reached in the latent state, the opening A is set so that the time saving period is not given. That is, it is configured so that a disadvantageous normal state in which a game is played by left-handed is easily set. In this way, by changing the combination of the jackpot type and the game state, the correspondence relationship with the opening type, and the correspondence relationship in a short period of time, the time saving state can be made most advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability that the player can be pleased by shifting to the time saving state rather than shifting to the probabilistic state or the latent state which is generally considered to be advantageous. .. In addition, in the normal state or the latent state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the time saving period is not given when the opening B is set as a big hit, so that one round of the big hit in which the opening B is set is not given. By not intentionally hitting the ball with the eyes, it is possible to fundamentally eliminate the anomalous game method that aims to shift to a time-saving state. More specifically, if the opening B is set to give a time saving period at the jackpot, only the time saving period is set after the jackpot by intentionally hitting the switch so that it does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3. The most advantageous time saving state is set for. That is, if an irregular game method is performed when a big hit is made in a disadvantageous state, there is a problem that the time is surely set to a shortened state. On the other hand, when the opening B is set, the time saving period is not given, so that even if the irregular game method is performed in the first round, the normal state is only set, which is irregular. The merit of executing the game method can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anomalous game methods.

Further, when the time saving state is set to the most advantageous gaming state, the configuration may be such that the probability change state is not provided. That is, the method of shifting the gaming state in the normal state or the latent state may be left as it is, and when a big hit occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving state may be basically looped or the state may be changed to the latent state. More specifically, when the time reduction state becomes "big hit γ", the opening A is set and the time reduction period of 100 times is set. That is, it is configured so that the most advantageous time saving state can be easily looped. On the other hand, when the time reduction state becomes "big hit δ", the opening B is set so that the time reduction period is not given. That is, it is configured so as to easily shift to a disadvantageous latent state. With this configuration, even if the player intentionally does not launch the ball in the first round when the time is reduced to "big hit δ", the player does not move to an advantageous state (time saving period). Is not given, so the normal state is entered), so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular game method in which the ball is not intentionally launched in the first round. That is, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in all the gaming states of the normal state, the latent state, and the time saving state. In addition, since the time saving state is more advantageous than the latent state, it is possible to please the player by shifting to the time saving state rather than shifting to the latent state which is generally considered to be advantageous. It is possible to provide a novel playability that can be done.

In the second embodiment, the avoidance period is always set when the latent state or the probable change state is set after the jackpot ends, but the avoidance period is not limited to this, and the avoidance period is set by lottery. May be determined. That is, a configuration may be provided in which the launch direction notification effect is executed immediately after the jackpot is completed and the launch direction notification effect is executed after the avoidance period has elapsed. In this case, the probability that the avoidance period is set when the latent probability state is set may be higher than that when the probability change state is set. With this configuration, when the avoidance period is set, the expectation for a more advantageous latent state can be increased.

<About the modified example of the second embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the second embodiment described above, the configuration is such that four gaming states of a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state are switched back and forth.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the three gaming states of the normal state, the time saving state, and the probable change state are switched back and forth. Then, in the probabilistic state, a loop is made when a big hit occurs, or a time saving state which is advantageous as compared with the normal state is set. Further, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, the time saving state which is advantageous as compared with the normal state is looped, or the state is returned to the most advantageous probability change state in this modified example. With such a configuration, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, even if a big hit occurs, it basically does not shift to the most disadvantageous normal state, so that the game can be played with peace of mind.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a method of shifting the gaming state in the modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73, in the normal state, when the jackpot F is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (and the jackpot J is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol), the probability change state is replaced with the latent probability state. The method of transitioning to the gaming state is the same as that of the second embodiment, except that the transition to is performed. That is, when the jackpot F is obtained in the normal state (and the jackpot J is reached), the time saving type selection table 202g is basically given a high probability state of the normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot. has been edited. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the jackpot F (or jackpot J) is set and the opening B is set, the time saving type selection table is given 100 times. 202g has been changed.

In addition, even in the time-saving state, if a jackpot J is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (and a jackpot F is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol), the state is changed to the probability change state instead of the latent state. Except for the above, the method of shifting the gaming state is the same as that of the second embodiment. That is, in the case of a jackpot J (and a jackpot F) in the time saving state, the time saving type selection table 202g is basically given a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next big hit. has been edited. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the jackpot J (or jackpot F) is set and the opening B is set, the time saving type selection table is given 100 times. 202g has been changed.

Further, in the probabilistic state, the most advantageous probabilistic state is obtained when the lottery of the second special symbol results in jackpots J, K, L (and when the lottery of the first special symbol results in jackpots F, G, H). It has been changed to loop. That is, when the jackpots J, K, L (and the jackpots F, G, H) in the probabilistic state, the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening B is set in each case. .. In addition, when the jackpot is J, K, L (and the jackpot F, G, H) and the probability change switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set, and the jackpot J , K, L (and jackpot F, G, H), and if the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the time saving type selection table 202g is changed so that the time saving period of 100 times is set. Has been done.

In addition, in the probabilistic state, when a jackpot I is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (and a jackpot E is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol), the time is shortened. That is, when the jackpot I is obtained in the probability change state (and the jackpot E is reached), the opening selection table 202e is changed so that the opening A is set. Further, when the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is reached and the probability variation switch 65e3 is passed, a high probability state of a normal symbol that continues until the next jackpot is set, and the jackpot I (or jackpot E) is obtained, and the probability variation switch 65e3 is pressed. When the ball does not pass, the time saving type selection table 202g is changed so that the time saving period of 50 times is set.

As described above, the probabilistic state can be set to the most advantageous state among the three types of states, that is, the transition method of the gaming state shown in FIG. 73, the normal state, the time saving state, and the probabilistic state. Then, when a big hit occurs in the probabilistic state, it can be basically configured to loop the probabilistic state or shift to the time saving state. As a result, when a disadvantageous jackpot (big hit I) occurs in the probabilistic state, it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most unfavorable normal state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game (so-called immediate disappointment). Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state, it is configured to return to the probability change state or the time saving state loops. With this configuration, when a disadvantageous jackpot (big hit I, K, L) occurs in a short time state, it is possible to prevent the player from falling to the most disadvantageous normal state. This can reduce the motivation of the player for the game and prevent (suppress) the player from immediately quitting the game (so-called immediate disappointment). Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the jackpot type is unfavorable in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the time saving state is set. Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area where a ball can enter is provided inside a ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, the game is played. Some of them are given special games that are advantageous to the player. Only the privileged game is given to such a privileged game (added value after the privileged game is not given), and as the added value after the privileged game, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Some are provided with a second privilege game that is set to a favorable game state. Further, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance provided with a specific area inside. Therefore, once the ball can be shifted to the advantageous gaming state, the privileged game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. Since it is easy to play, it forms an extremely advantageous state for the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if the first privilege game is determined in the advantageous gaming state, the player falls to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state. Therefore, when the normal gaming state is set, the player There was a problem that the motivation for the game was greatly impaired.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, when the advantageous probabilistic state ends, it is prevented from falling to the most unfavorable normal state, and a relatively advantageous time saving state is set as compared with the normal state. Since the configuration is easy, even when the advantageous probability change state ends, it is possible to make the player think that the game will be continued until the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from being lowered, and thus it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, the advantageous jackpot type is different depending on the game state, but the advantageous jackpot type and the disadvantageous jackpot type may be fixed. .. More specifically, for example, the jackpot F and the jackpot J may be an advantageous jackpot type, and the other jackpot types may be a disadvantageous jackpot type. Then, in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot F and J are set to shift to the latent state (probability change state in the case of the modified example), and the same state is looped by being set to another jackpot type. May be good. Further, in the latent state, the latent probability state may be looped by becoming a jackpot F and J, and the latent probability state may be changed to another jackpot type. Further, in the probability change state, the probability change state may be looped by becoming jackpots F and J, and the time saving state may be shifted to another jackpot type. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which an advantageous jackpot type and a disadvantageous jackpot type are easy to understand.

In the second embodiment and the modified example of the second embodiment, the game state (latent state or probable change state) that is advantageous when a big hit is made in the time saving state is shifted to, or the time saving state is looped. However, the game state set when a big hit is made in a short time state is not limited to this. For example, when a big hit occurs in a short time state, the opening B may be set so as to be sure. That is, the jackpot may be won before the short period of time elapses, so that the game can be returned to an advantageous gaming state without fail. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect a big hit before the time saving period elapses, so that the player's interest in playing the game in the time saving state can be further improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2 are provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the probability change switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge flow path 65e2 is passed during the jackpot. In this case, a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not a high probability state of a special symbol is given after a big hit according to the big hit type and the game state at the time when the big hit is won. That is, instead of the opening selection table 202e, a data table that defines the jackpot type and the gaming state according to the gaming state is provided, and this data table is referred to at the end of the jackpot to set the gaming state after the jackpot. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the same effect as that of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can be obtained, and the internal mechanism of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the same operation is set for the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k regardless of the jackpot type and the game state, but the opening period is changed according to the jackpot type and the game state. Alternatively or additionally, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k may be changed according to the jackpot type and the gaming state. With such a configuration, the same effect as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be obtained, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In each of the above embodiments, as long as the probability change switch 65e3 is continuously passed, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuous without limitation, but the number of consecutive times may be limited. Specifically, for example, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is counted, and when the number of consecutive times becomes a specific number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability changes at the next jackpot. It may be configured so that the passage of the switch 65e3 is invalid (the probability change counter 203g or the probability change flag 203u is not updated even if the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on, or the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed). .. Further, a special gaming state is provided in which the flow path solenoid 65k does not change even if a big hit occurs (that is, the special discharge flow path 65e2 is not opened during the big hit), and the number of consecutive high-probability states of the special symbol is a specific number of times. When (for example, 5 times), the flow path solenoid 65k may be shifted to a gaming state in which it does not operate. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the high-probability state of the special symbol from becoming excessively continuous, and thus prevent (suppress) the unexpected disadvantage to the hole. be able to.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (V winning rate can be changed according to the game status even if the hit type is the same)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of discrimination conditions, privilege game execution means that executes privilege games that are advantageous to the player based on the result of discrimination by the discrimination means, and privilege game execution. As a type of award game executed by the means, a type determining means for determining one type of award game from a plurality of predetermined types, and a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball in a gaming machine provided with The first variable means and its first variable means that can be changed to an open position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position in which it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. Based on the determination result obtained by the determination means, the first variable means and the first variable means after the privilege game is started with respect to the first variable pattern and the first variable pattern. The first variable control means that is variable by any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that has a different period until the open position is changed, and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means A second position that can be changed to a first position that allows the ball to enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means and a second position that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The second variable control means and the privilege game are being executed, in which the two variable means and the second variable means are changed in a predetermined specific variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the determination means. When the gaming ball enters the specific area, the gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state after executing the privileged game to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player and the specific determination result are obtained. A determination means for determining one variable pattern to be changed by the first variable control means from the plurality of variable patterns based on a game state at a time point and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. The first variable pattern is such that a gaming ball that has entered the ball-entry means during a period in which the first variable means is variable to the open position can enter the specific region. The two variable patterns are such that a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period in which the first variable means is variable to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being present.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a time-saving state that makes it easier to start and win a prize than usual as a bonus after winning. In this conventional gaming machine, after a big hit, the time saving state is given or not, and the time saving period when the time saving state is given is changed according to the gaming state at the time of hitting. There are some that diversify the state of the game and improve the interest of the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if diversity is given in a short period of time, the winning lottery probability is fixed according to the type of winning, so that the player's interest can be sufficiently improved. Was difficult.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first variable means is set to an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. Is variable. Based on the result of a specific determination by the determination means, the first variable pattern and the period from the start of the privilege game for the first variable pattern until the first variable means is changed to the open position. The first variable means is variable by the variable control means in any of a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern in which is at least different. The first position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The second variable means is changed to the second position, and the second variable means has a specific determination result determined by the second variable control means based on the determination result. It is variable. When the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is executed is set to the advantageous game state advantageous to the player by the game state setting means. Based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privileged game determined by the type determining means, one variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means from a plurality of variable patterns is the determining means. Is determined by. The first variable pattern is configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period when the first variable means is variable to the open position can enter a specific area, and the second variable pattern is a second variable pattern. It is configured so that a game ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period when the variable means is variable to the open position is more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern.

As a result, the rate at which the first variable pattern that facilitates entry into the specific area is set is variable based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privilege game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the ratio at which the advantageous gaming state is set can be changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and a second variable pattern in which the first variable pattern is more difficult to determine than the first advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that an advantageous gaming state is included at least.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the advantageous gaming state includes the first advantageous gaming state in which the first variable pattern is easily determined by the determining means, and the first advantageous gaming state rather than the first advantageous gaming state. Since at least the second advantageous gaming state in which the variable pattern is difficult to be determined is included, when the gaming ball enters a specific area, the game is performed with the expectation that the first advantageous gaming state will be determined. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2, the first advantageous gaming state is a game in which the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means. Machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, in the first advantageous gaming state, the first variable pattern is determined by the determining means regardless of the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means. When the first advantageous gaming state is reached, the advantageous gaming state is likely to be set after the next privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction when the first advantageous gaming state is reached.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the gaming state setting means after executing the privilege game is the advantageous game. The game state setting means is set to a disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous than the state, and the game state setting means moves to the specific area during the execution of the privilege game based on the specific determination result obtained in the disadvantageous game state. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, when a ball enters, the ratio of setting the first advantageous gaming state is higher than the ratio of setting the second advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the privilege game is executed is set to the disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state by the game state setting means. Will be done. When a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a specific game based on a specific determination result in an unfavorable game state, the rate at which the first advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means is determined. It is configured to be higher than the rate at which the second advantageous gaming state is set.

As a result, when the privilege game is executed in the disadvantageous game state, the first advantageous game state can be expected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered in the unfavorable game state.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming state setting means is performing the privilege game based on the specific determination result in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that when the gaming ball enters the specific area, the ratio of setting the first advantageous gaming state is high.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the privilege game is being executed based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained in the first advantageous gaming state rather than the second advantageous gaming state. When a game ball enters a specific area, the ratio of the first advantageous game state being set by the game state setting means is high. Therefore, once the first advantageous game state is reached, a plurality of privilege games are played. It becomes easy to set the first advantageous gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged gaming is continuously completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation for the first advantageous gaming state can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming state setting means is the first advantageous gaming when the second advantageous gaming state is set and a specific condition different from the end of the privilege game is satisfied. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that it sets a state.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, when the second advantageous gaming state is set, the gaming state is satisfied when a specific condition different from the end of the privileged game is satisfied. Since the first advantageous gaming state is set by the setting means, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous gaming state with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The first variable position in which the game ball can enter into the ball entry discriminating means, the ball entering discriminating means in which the discriminating by the discriminating means is executed when the ball enters the gaming machine A6, and the first variable position thereof. As a variable mode of the third variable means that can be changed to the second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the position and the third variable means thereof, the first variable mode that is easily changed to the first variable position and the first variable mode thereof. A control means that can be controlled at least in a second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than in the first variable mode, and in the first advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is said by the control means. The gaming machine A7, which is controlled in the second variable mode, is characterized in that the third variable means is controlled by the control means in the first variable mode.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third variable means is changed to a first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entry determination means and a second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. .. As the variable mode of the third variable means, at least the first variable mode that is easily changed to the first variable position and the second variable mode that is less likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first variable position are controlled by the control means. To. In the first advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the second variable mode, and in the second advantageous gaming state, the third variable means is controlled in the first variable mode.

As a result, in the second advantageous gaming state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that in the first advantageous gaming state, the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed, so that the game can be efficiently performed in the second advantageous gaming state. is there.

<Characteristic B group> (Transition from probability change to advantageous latency by missing support)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means, and the privilege game execution. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the means is completed, the first game state in which the probability of the specific determination result being obtained by the determination means is set as the first probability, and the first game state is higher than the first probability. A gaming state setting means that can at least set a second gaming state set to the second probability and a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the second gaming state and in which the second probability is set, and the game state setting means thereof. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state without triggering the end of the privilege game state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by providing means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a probability-changing state in which the probability of winning a lottery is high as a privilege after winning. Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined upper limit number of times is set for the number of lottery in the probabilistic state, and if the lottery does not reach the predetermined upper limit number of lottery, the winning is won. In addition to returning the lottery probability to the normal probability, there is a method of shifting to a state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, which is different from the probability change state. If you win in this special state, the game value given to the player will be greater than if you win in the probability change state, so even if the probability change state ends before the hit, the player's motivation for the game will be motivated. It can be maintained (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-130988).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in the special state set after the probability change state ends, the winning lottery probability becomes the normal probability, so that the lottery probability may be lost over a relatively large number of lottery times. The sex becomes high. Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player cannot be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the determination by the discrimination means resulting in a specific determination result. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, the first game state in which the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means is set as the first probability, and the first game state is higher than the first probability. The second gaming state set in the second probability and the third gaming state which is more advantageous than the second gaming state and in which the second probability is set can be at least set by the gaming state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means without triggering the end of the privileged gaming state.

As a result, even if the game is not a privileged game, the game state can be changed from the second game state to the third game state by the game state changing means, so that the player's interest in the game in the second game state can be improved. There is an effect.

When the third game state is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means in the game machine B1, the second game is performed for at least a predetermined number of times including the privilege game. A gaming machine B2 comprising a continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which a gaming state in which a probability is set is easily set.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game by the gaming state setting means, at least a predetermined number of times including the privileged game Since the continuous state is set by the continuous state setting means, which makes it easy to set the game state in which the second probability is set over the privileged game, the game can be performed with the expectation that the continuous state will be set. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the gaming state setting means ends the privilege game when the privilege game is executed in the second game state rather than the privilege game is executed in the third game state. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the gaming state after the game to the first gaming state is high.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the award game is executed in the second gaming state rather than the award game is executed in the third gaming state, the award gaming is performed. Since the ratio of the first game state being set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end is high, in the second game state, the game state changing means is used before the privilege game is executed. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player expect that the third game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the gaming state setting means is either the second gaming state or the third gaming state when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed. The gaming machine B4, which is characterized in that the above can be set.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed, the second gaming state and the third gaming state are set by the gaming state setting means. Since either of the game states is set, the second probability is set after the privilege game is completed. Therefore, since the gaming state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that the player can be pleased by entering the third gaming state.

A ball-entry means in which discrimination by the discriminating means is executed when a game ball enters in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a first position in which the game ball becomes difficult to enter into the ball-entry means, and a first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means as compared to one position, and the variable means thereof are provided from the first position to the second position based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine including a variable control means that changes to a position for a predetermined period of time, wherein the second gaming state is more likely to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state. B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry means as compared with the first position. .. The variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The second gaming state is more likely to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state.

As a result, the determination by the determination means can be easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second game state.

Based on the fact that the second gaming state is set in any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, a counting means for counting the number of consecutive deviation determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming state changing means changes the gaming state from the second gaming state to the third gaming state based on the number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result counted by the counting means reaches a specific number of times. The gaming machine B6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the setting of the second game state, the counting means counts the number of consecutive deviation determination results that are different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means based on the number of consecutive deviation determination results counted by the counting means reaching a specific number of times.

As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the deviation discrimination result will be continuous rather than the specific discrimination result, so that a gaming machine having a novel game property can be provided. It has the effect of being able to.

As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines B1 to B6, a type determination means for determining the type of one privilege game from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are included. The ball-possible entry means, the open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. 1 The first variable position in which the variable means and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and the first variable position thereof are compared with each other. Based on the fact that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the second variable means and the discrimination means that can be changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the specific region, the first variable means and the said As the variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern and the predetermined variable pattern variable by the variable control means, the first variable means is entered during the period when the first variable means is changed to the open position. At least a first variable pattern that allows a gaming ball that has entered the ball means to enter the specific area and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. The game state setting means is provided with a decidable determining means, and when the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the gaming state after the privilege game is completed is the second. It is set to either the gaming state or the third gaming state, and the determining means includes the gaming state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained, and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that a variable pattern of 1 is determined based on the above.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is variable to an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. A first variable position in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and an entry into a specific area as compared with the first variable position. The second variable means is variable to the second variable position where the ball becomes difficult. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the discriminating means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter a specific area while the first variable means is variable to the open position. The second variable pattern, which makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern, is configured to be at least determinable by the determining means. When the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the end of the privilege game is set to either the second game state or the third game state by the game state setting means. .. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means.

As a result, the ease of setting a variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a specific area is made different based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of award game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the ratio at which the second probability is set after the end of the privilege game can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern are characterized in that the period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position is at least different. The gaming machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least a period from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position. Since they are configured differently, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B8, the gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, since the operation of the second variable means is the same for the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern, there is one way to control the second variable means. It is only necessary to specify variable control, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic C group> (Direction that makes it difficult to understand the advantageous launch direction)
A launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area based on a player's operation, a first path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path described above. A first ball-entry means arranged on one path and capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means and the first ball-entry means arranged on the second path and capable of entering a game ball, or the first ball-entry means. 2 A privilege to execute a discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means and a privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. When the game ball is launched into the first path rather than the second path when the privileged game executed by the game executing means and the privileged game executing means is completed, the discrimination by the discriminating means is likely to be executed. 1 from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is facilitated when a gaming ball is launched into the second path rather than the first path. A condition determining means and its condition for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied by a gaming ball launched by the launching means after one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means capable of setting the gaming state and the gaming state setting means. Based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means, the effect execution means for executing the specific effect of the mode suggesting a route that facilitates the determination by the determination means as the path for launching the game ball. A gaming machine C1 characterized by being equipped with.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning state that is advantageous to the player is given when the lottery result executed based on the starting prize is won. Some of these conventional gaming machines are given a time-saving state in which a starting prize is likely to occur, at least in a part of the winning. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of starting winning openings are provided in the gaming board, and the game balls can easily win a prize in some of the starting winning openings due to the shortened time. This gaming machine provides a more understandable game by executing an effect (suggestion effect) that suggests which start winning opening the game should be aimed at according to whether or not the time is shortened. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-230825).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the time is shortened after hitting, the suggestion effect is immediately executed, so that the expectation of whether or not the time is shortened is maintained only until the end of the jackpot at the longest. There was a problem that it could not be done.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by the launching means based on the operation of the player, and the first path through which the launched gaming ball can pass and the first path thereof. A second route different from the above is provided. A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the first path, and a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the second path. Discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the privilege game is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the execution means. When the game ball is launched from the second route to the first route when the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means ends, the first game state and the first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means becomes easier to be executed. One game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination by the discriminating means becomes easier to be executed when the game ball is launched on the second path rather than the path. After the game state 1 was set by the game state setting means, it was determined by the condition determination means whether the predetermined condition was satisfied by the game ball launched by the launching means, and it was determined by the condition determination means that the predetermined condition was satisfied. Based on this, the effect executing means executes a specific effect of an aspect suggesting a route that facilitates the determination by the discriminating means as the path for launching the game ball.

As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the expectation that the more advantageous game state is set can be maintained at least until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine C1, it is variable to a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the second position as compared with the first position. The second gaming state includes the means and the variable control means for varying the means and the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the second gaming state is more specific than the first gaming state. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that the conditions are easily satisfied.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position where the game ball can easily enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball entry means. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the variable control means based on the establishment of the specific condition. The second gaming state is configured so that specific conditions are more likely to be satisfied than in the first gaming state.

As a result, in the second game state, the launching means can be operated in an attempt to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance while the variable means is changed to the first position. It has the effect of improving the willingness to participate in the game.

The pachinko / pachislot machine C2 includes a passing means through which the game ball can pass and a predetermined discriminating means for executing a predetermined determination based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball. The specific condition is determined by the predetermined discriminating means. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result is obtained, and the predetermined condition is that the gaming ball launched by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means passes through the passing means a specific number of times. The gaming machine C3, which is characterized in that it is established when the game is played.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means. A specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined determination result is obtained by the predetermined determination means. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means passes through the passing means a specific number of times.

As a result, the player can shoot the ball aiming at the passing means in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, as the passing means, at least a first passing means arranged in the first path and a second passing means arranged in the second path are provided. Amusement machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, at least a first passing means arranged on the first path and a second passing means arranged on the second path are provided as passing means. Therefore, before the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to launch the game ball to the player's favorite route and expect the predetermined condition to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine C4, the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the second gaming state, and the predetermined condition is launched by the launching means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is established when the played gaming ball first passes through the first passing means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means first passes through the first passing means after the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means.

Thereby, the game ball can be launched to the first path in the expectation that the specific effect suggests the first path in which the discrimination by the discriminating means is easily executed in the advantageous first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from the establishment of the specific condition until the variable means is changed to the first position is the period from the time when the variable means is changed to the first position by the launching means. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the gaming ball launched into the path is longer than the period required to reach the second ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, at least in the second gaming state, the period from the establishment of the specific condition until the variable means is changed to the first position is , When the set gaming state is the second gaming state because the gaming ball launched into the second path by the launching means is configured to be longer than the period required to reach the second entering means. In addition, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied based on passing through the passing means and the second path is suggested by the specific effect, the second ball entering means before the variable means is changed to the first position. The game ball can be reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity of discrimination by the discrimination means can be fully utilized in the second game state.

The gaming machine C2 is provided with a predetermined ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, which is provided in the first path, and the predetermined condition is met by the launching means after the game state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is established when the launched gaming ball first enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined ball entry means different from the first ball entry means is provided in the first path. Then, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the launching means first enters the predetermined ball entering means after the gaming state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, the ball can be launched aiming at the predetermined ball entry means in an attempt to satisfy the predetermined condition, so that there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, a first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and the first path. A first ball-entry means arranged on one path and capable of entering a game ball and a second ball-entry means and the first ball-entry means arranged on the second path and capable of entering a game ball, or the first ball-entry means. 2 A privilege to execute a discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means and a privilege to execute a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. When the game ball is launched into the first route rather than the second route when the privilege game executed by the game execution means and the privilege game execution means is completed, the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed. 1 from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which discrimination by the discriminating means is facilitated when a gaming ball is launched into the second path rather than the first path. Based on the game state setting means capable of setting the game state, the timekeeping means for measuring the elapsed time since the game state of 1 is set by the game state setting means, and the time specified by the timekeeping means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized by comprising, as an effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an aspect suggesting a path in which the determination by the discriminating means is easily executed, as a path for launching the game ball.

According to the gaming machine C8, the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area by the launching means based on the operation of the player, and the first path through which the launched gaming ball can pass is defined as the first path. A different second route is provided. A first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the first path, and a second ball entry means on which a game ball can enter is arranged on the second path. Discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the privilege game is based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. A privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the execution means. When the game ball is launched from the second route to the first route when the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means ends, the first game state and the first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means becomes easier to be executed. One game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination by the discriminating means becomes easier to be executed when the game ball is launched on the second path rather than the path. The elapsed time from the setting of one game state by the game state setting means is timed by the timekeeping means, and the determination means is used as a route for launching the game ball based on the time when the time has reached a specific elapsed time by the timekeeping means. The effect executing means executes a specific effect of an aspect suggesting a route that facilitates the determination.

As a result, even if the game state is set, the specific effect is not executed until the specific elapsed time is reached, so that the expectation that the more advantageous game state is set is maintained until at least the specific elapsed time is reached. It has the effect of being able to.

As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the game machines C1 to C8, a type determination means for determining the type of one privilege game from a plurality of predetermined types and a game ball are included. It is possible to change between a variable ball-entry means that can ball and an open position where a game ball can enter the variable ball-entry means, and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball-entry means than the open position. The first variable position and the first variable position in which the gaming ball that has entered the first variable means and the variable entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable entry means. Based on the fact that the specific discrimination result is obtained by the second variable means that can be changed to the second variable position that makes it difficult to enter the specific region as compared with the position and the discrimination means, the first The first variable means is changed to the open position as the predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means that changes the variable means and the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern and the variable control means. A first variable pattern that allows a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means during the period to enter the specific area, and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. The gaming state setting means includes at least a determining means capable of determining a pattern, and the gaming state setting means is a gaming state after the privilege game is completed when the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the privilege game. Is set to either the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area, a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The determination means determines one variable pattern based on the game state at the time when the specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determination means. A gaming machine C9 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type of the privilege game is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of predetermined types. The first variable means is variable to an open position where the game ball can enter the variable ball entry means and a closed position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. A first variable position in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the variable ball entry means, and a specific area as compared with the first variable position. The second variable means is changed to the second variable position where it is difficult to enter the ball. The first variable means and the second variable means are varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the discriminating means. As a predetermined variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter a specific area while the first variable means is variable to the open position. The second variable pattern, which makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern, is at least determined by the determining means. When the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the end of the privilege game is set to either the first game state or the second game state by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game, the game state after the end of the privilege game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state by the game state setting means. The game state is set. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of the privileged game determined by the type determining means.

As a result, the ease of setting a variable pattern that facilitates entry into a specific area is made different based on the game state at the time when a specific determination result is obtained and the type of privileged game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, the ratio at which the first game state or the second game state is set after the end of the privilege game can be changed according to the game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C9, the determination means is more likely to determine the first variable pattern when the specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state than when the specific determination result is obtained in the second gaming state. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the first variable is made by the determining means when a specific determination result is obtained in the first gaming state rather than a specific determination result in the second gaming state. Since the pattern is easily determined, it can be expected that the specific effect suggests a first route that facilitates the determination in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have at least different periods from the start of the privilege game until the first variable means changes to the open position. The gaming machine C11 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine C9 or C10, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern change the first variable means to the open position after the privilege game is started. Since the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position at least differently, the variable pattern can be predicted by the period until the first variable means is changed to the open position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C11, the gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C11, the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern have the same operation of the second variable means, so that there is only one way to control the second variable means. Only variable control needs to be specified, which has the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Characteristic D group> (Non-V and time reduction is given during probability change and pullback time reduction)
The determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the privilege game execution means that executes the privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination by the determination means, and the establishment of the specific condition. A game state setting capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which discrimination by a discriminating means is more likely to be executed than the first game state. In a gaming machine equipped with means, a ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, an open position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and entry into the ball-entry means rather than the open position. The first variable means that can be changed to a closed position where the ball becomes difficult and the first variable means thereof are changed in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. A first position in which the variable control means and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter a specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and the specific area rather than the first position. The second variable control means and the second variable control means, which can be changed to the second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, are specified in advance based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. As a second variable control means that is variable by the variable pattern of the above and a variable pattern that is variable by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter the specific area and a first variable pattern thereof. A determination means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns including at least a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area, and a game ball to the specific area during execution of the privilege game. The gaming state setting means includes a privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege advantageous to the player at a higher rate than when the ball enters the specific area, and the gaming state setting means has the privilege. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the second gaming state can be set when the specific privilege is not granted by the granting means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a specific area where a ball can enter is provided inside a ball entrance provided on the board surface, and when the ball enters the specific area, the game is played. Some have a higher percentage of certain benefits that are beneficial to the person. As such a specific privilege, a second privilege game is provided in which the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entrance provided with a specific area inside. Therefore, once the ball can be shifted to the advantageous gaming state, the privileged game and the advantageous gaming state are repeated. Since it is easy to play, it forms an extremely advantageous state for the player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, if a lottery for whether or not to grant a specific privilege is missed in an advantageous gaming state, the player falls to the most disadvantageous normal gaming state. There is a problem that the motivation of the player for the game is greatly impaired.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first variable means is set to an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and an open position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the open position. Is variable, and the first variable means is changed in a predetermined variable pattern by the first variable control means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result. The first position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area provided inside the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the first position. The variable means is variable to the second position, and the second variable means is variable by a specific variable pattern predetermined by the second variable control means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminant means results in a specific discriminant result. Will be done. As variable patterns that are variable by the first variable control means, a first variable pattern that allows a game ball to enter a specific area and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult to enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. One variable pattern is determined by the determining means from a plurality of variable patterns including at least the variable pattern. When a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of a privilege game, a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege granting means at a higher rate than when the ball does not enter the specific area. .. When a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means, the second gaming state can be set by the gaming state setting means.

As a result, the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, is set when the specific privilege is not given, so that the player's motivation for the game is impaired when the specific privilege is not given. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the first game state, the first game state is set by the game state setting means. On the other hand, when a specific privilege is not given by the privilege giving means in the privilege game executed in the second game state, the second game state is set by the game state setting means.

As a result, in the second gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, the second gaming state is set even if a specific privilege is not given, so that the motivation of the player for the game in the second gaming state can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are such that the probability of the specific determination result is set as the first probability, and the gaming state setting means is the specific determination. It is possible to set a third gaming state in which the probability of the result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability, and the privilege granting means is the third gaming state setting means as the specific privilege. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that the gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained is set as the first probability. A third gaming state in which the probability of a specific determination result is set to a second probability higher than the first probability is also configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means. As a specific privilege, the privilege granting means is configured so that the gaming state setting means sets the third gaming state.

As a result, when a specific privilege is given, a specific determination result is likely to be obtained, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's expectation for a specific privilege can be further improved.

In the gaming machine D3, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, when a specific privilege is not granted by the privilege granting means in the privilege game executed in the third gaming state, the second game is performed by the gaming state setting means. Since the state is set, it is possible to suppress the setting from the third gaming state to the disadvantageous first gaming state. Therefore, even if a specific privilege is not given in the third gaming state, there is an effect that the motivation of the player for the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

A ball entry means in which discrimination by the discriminating means is executed based on the entry of the game ball in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, and a first variable position in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the third variable means which can be changed to the second variable position where the ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position, the passing means through which the game ball can pass, and the passing means. The third variable means is changed from the second variable position to the first variable position based on the predetermined determination means for executing the predetermined determination and the determination by the predetermined determination means resulting in a predetermined determination result. The gaming machine D5 including the third variable control means, wherein the second gaming state has a higher probability of obtaining the predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third variable means is changed to a first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second variable position where the ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. A predetermined determination is executed by the predetermined determination means based on the passage of the game ball through the passing means, and the third variable means controls the 23rd variable based on the determination result obtained by the determination by the predetermined determination means. It is variable from the second variable position to the first variable position by means. The second gaming state is configured to have a higher probability of producing a predetermined determination result than the first gaming state.

As a result, a predetermined determination can be easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game more efficiently.

<Characteristic E group> (100% probability change in advantageous state)
A specific discrimination result was obtained by the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the ball entering means that the game ball can enter and the ball entering means and the discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on this, in a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player and a variable ball-entry means for allowing the game ball to enter during the execution of the privileged game, the variable ball-entry means The game ball did not enter the specific entry area where the game ball placed inside and entered the variable entry means can enter and the specific entry area during the execution of the privilege game 1. In this case, the first gaming state is set, and when the gaming ball enters the specific entry area during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. As the ball entry rate of the game ball with respect to the specific ball entry area in the game state setting means and the privilege game of 1, the first ball entry rate and the second entry rate higher than the first ball entry rate. The ball entry rate setting means is provided with at least a ball rate setting means, and the ball entry rate setting means is provided with the privilege game in the first game state when the privilege game is executed in the second game state. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the rate of setting the second ball entry rate is higher than that in the case where is executed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a winning is achieved by a lottery executed based on the starting ball, a specific winning opening is provided in which the ball is set to an open state in which the ball can be entered. In some cases, benefits are given when a ball enters the winning opening. Further, in some of such conventional gaming machines, a specific ball entry area is provided inside the specific winning opening to give a probability fluctuation state when the ball enters the ball. In addition, the ease of entering a specific ball entry region differs depending on the type of hit (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245172).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the ease of entering a specific ball entry area is fixed according to the hit type, so that the probability fluctuates state when the hit type is known. The degree of expectation may be known, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to maintain the degree of expectation for the probability fluctuation state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, when the privilege game is executed in the second gaming state which is advantageous to the player, the ratio of setting the second ball entry rate is high, so that the second gaming state continues. During this period, there is an effect that the game ball can be continuously expected to enter the specific ball entry area.

In the gaming machine E1, at least a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided as the ball entry means, and the ball entry rate setting means is the second entry means. The specific determination result is obtained based on the entry into the ball means, and the specific determination result is obtained based on the entry into the first entry means in the second gaming state. When the rate of setting the second ball entry rate becomes high and the specific determination result is obtained based on the ball entry into the first ball entry means in the first gaming state, the first ball entry rate is set. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized in that the ratio of playing machines is high.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, in the second gaming state, the ratio of setting the second ball entry rate is high when a specific determination result is obtained regardless of the type of the ball entry means. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the game can be performed without worrying about the entry means into which the gaming ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in the second game state.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to change between a first variable position in which the game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means and a second variable position in which the game ball is harder to enter than the first variable position. The first variable control means and the first variable means thereof are provided upstream of the first variable control means and the specific ball-entry region, which are variable according to a predetermined first variable pattern during the execution of the privilege game. A first variable state in which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can easily enter the specific ball entry area, and a game ball enters the specific ball entry area as compared with the first variable state. A second variable control that changes the second variable means that can be changed to a second variable state that becomes difficult to play and the second variable means according to a second variable pattern that is predetermined based on the start of the privilege game. The first variable means, which is variable according to the first variable pattern, is moved to the first variable position as a period from the start of execution of the means and the privilege game to the start of control by the first variable control means. The first period in which the period in which the second variable means is changed according to the second variable pattern and the period in which the second variable means is in the first variable state are less likely to overlap, and the first variable means is more than the first period. The ball entry rate setting means is provided with a period setting means capable of setting a period in which the first variable position is reached and a second period in which the period in which the second variable means is in the first variable state is likely to overlap. Controls the period setting means to set the first period as the first ball entry rate, and controls the period setting means to set the second period as the second ball entry rate. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, only the period from the start of the execution of the privilege game to the start of the control by the first variable control means is changed to enter the ball. Since the rate can be changed, it is not necessary to set a complicated variable pattern, and there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B9, C1 to C12, D1 to D5, and E1 to E3, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Game machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Some of such gaming machines are set to one of a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage when the hit state ends. Specifically, for example, a normal state having a low degree of advantage, a probability fluctuation state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the like are set. In this conventional gaming machine, by diversifying the gaming state set after the big hit, the player's interest in the game is improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a state with a low degree of advantage is set when the end of the hit state is set, it is not possible to shift to a state with a high degree of advantage at least until the next hit state. There is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game when the degree of advantage is low.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. As a privilege game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player and a game state after the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means is completed, the probability that the specific determination result will be obtained by the determination means is first. The first game state set to the probability, the second game state set to the second probability higher than the first probability, and the second game state which is more advantageous than the second game state, and the second probability is set. When the second game state is set by the game state setting means capable of setting at least the third game state to be performed and the game state setting means, the game state is not triggered by the end of the privilege game state. Is provided with a gaming state changing means capable of changing from the second gaming state to the third gaming state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game by the gaming state setting means. A continuous state setting means for setting a continuous state in which the game state in which the second probability is set is easily set over at least a predetermined number of times of the privileged game including the above is provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the gaming state setting means is the second gaming state rather than the privilege game being executed in the third gaming state. When the privileged game is executed in, the ratio of setting the game state after the privileged game is completed to the first game state is high.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the gaming state setting means is used when the privilege game executed in the third gaming state is completed. Either the second gaming state or the third gaming state can be set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is a ball entering means for which the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed when the gaming ball enters the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, and the ball entering means thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a first position that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the means, and a second position that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means as compared to the first position, and its variable The means is provided with variable control means for changing the means from the first position to the second position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the second gaming state is the variable control means rather than the third gaming state. Therefore, it is easy to change to the second position.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, the first game state in which the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means is set as the first probability, and the first game state is higher than the first probability. The second gaming state set in the second probability and the third gaming state which is more advantageous than the second gaming state and in which the second probability is set can be at least set by the gaming state setting means. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the third gaming state by the gaming state changing means without triggering the end of the privileged gaming state.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the third gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the privileged game by the gaming state setting means. , The continuous state in which the second probability is set easily over at least a predetermined number of privilege games including the privilege game is set by the continuous state setting means, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to make it.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, the privileged game is performed in the second gaming state rather than the privileged game is executed in the third gaming state. Is executed, the ratio of the first game state being set by the game state setting means as the game state after the end of the privilege game is high, so that the privilege game is executed in the second game state. It is possible to provide a novel game property that the third game state is expected to be set by the game state changing means before the game state is changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the gaming state is when the privileged game executed in the third gaming state is completed. Since either the second gaming state or the third gaming state is set by the setting means, the second probability is set after the privilege game is completed. Therefore, since the game state in which the second probability is set is continuously set, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 4. That is, the variable means is changed to a first position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is easier to enter the ball entry means as compared with the first position. .. The variable means is changed from the first position to the second position by the variable control means for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The second gaming state is more likely to be changed to the second position by the variable control means than the third gaming state.
As a result, the determination by the determination means can be easily executed in the second game state, so that there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed in the second game state.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37 First symbol display device (display means)
64 1st ball entry port (1st ball entry means)
65 Variable winning device (variable ball entry means)
67 Through gate (passing means)
112 Launch control device (launch means)
640 Second ball entry port (second ball entry means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S217 Part of the discrimination means S218 Variable game execution means
S222 Second game state setting means S305 Part of the discriminating means S512 Predetermined discriminating means S525 Variable control means S1211, S1212 Game state setting means S1722, S4002 Condition discriminating means
S3905 Third production execution means S4004, S4005 Second production execution means

Claims (2)

A launching means that can launch a game ball into the game area based on the player's operation,
A first path through which the game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and
A first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball passing through the first path can enter a ball and a position where a game ball passing through the second path is difficult to enter.
A second ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball passing through the second path can enter and a position where the game ball passing through the first path is difficult to enter.
A variable means that can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where the game ball becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry means.
A discriminating means that executes discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means.
A first state in which the game ball is possible ball entrance, a variable, variable ball entrance means, and a second state in which the game ball is difficult ball entrance than its first state,
A privilege-giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the variable ball-entry means,
Based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, the variable ball entry means executes a variable game in which the second state is changed to the first state for a predetermined period. Variable game execution means and
From the first game state in which the determination of the determination means is more easily executed when the game ball is launched to the first path than to the second path based on the establishment of the predetermined setting conditions, and from the first path. A game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which discrimination of the discriminating means is more easily executed by firing a game ball on the second path. When,
Based on the completion of the execution of the variable game, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect configured by the common effect mode regardless of the game state after the execution of the variable game is completed, and the first effect execution means.
A game that is different from the first effect and is after the execution of the variable game is completed by the game state setting means based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the first effect. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect configured to include at least a specific effect mode capable of suggesting a route corresponding to the game state set as the state to the player, and
Based on the fact that the first condition, which is at least different from the determination result of the determination means in the second gaming state, is satisfied, the first gaming state is performed without going through the variable game. Second game state setting means that can be set,
Execution of the third effect, which is configured to include at least an effect mode that can suggest to the player that the game ball is launched into the first path when the first condition is satisfied. With means ,
Even when the game ball is fired into said first path during the previous SL first effect, even when the game ball is fired into the second path has a configuration in which the specific condition can be satisfied ,
When a game corresponding to the second gaming state is played in the second gaming state, the variable means is variable to the first position rather than playing a game corresponding to the first gaming state in the first gaming state. It is a configuration that tends to be done more frequently.
When a game corresponding to the first gaming state is played in the first gaming state, it is at least different from the variable ball-entry means than when a game corresponding to the second gaming state is played in the second gaming state. gaming machine characterized by constituting der Rukoto the ball entrance frequency of game ball is likely higher for a given ball entrance means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

Images